2013 Dodge Durango Owner`s Manual

2013 Dodge Durango Owner`s Manual
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Durango
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional
on this vehicle. This manual may also include a description
of features and equipment that are no longer available or
were not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any
features and equipment described in this manual that are
not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously
manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .8
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .9
1
4 INTRODUCTION
handles on different road surfaces. Your driving skills
will improve with experience. When driving off-road or
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
working the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of physics.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
wherever you drive.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go places and
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
perform tasks that conventional passenger cars are not
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or a
intended. It handles and maneuvers differently from
collision. Refer to “On-Road/Off-Road Driving Tips” in
many passenger cars both on-road and off-road, so take
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
time to become familiar with your vehicle.
The two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assisfor on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
driving or use in other severe conditions suited for a you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
four-wheel drive vehicle.
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Owner’s read these publications carefully. Following the instrucManual. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, tions and recommendations in this manual will help
particularly those used for braking, steering, transmis- assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
sion, and transfer case shifting. Learn how your vehicle
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
injury. Drive carefully.
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than
many passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an
unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because
of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of
control it may roll over when some other vehicles may
not.
Rollover Warning Label
1
6 INTRODUCTION
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 7
1
8 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
vehicle. Save this label for a convenient record of your
vehicle identification number and optional equipment.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on a
plate located on the left front corner of the instrument
panel pad, visible from outside of the vehicle through the
windshield. This number also is stamped into the right
front body, behind the right front seat. Move the right
front seat forward to allow better viewing of the stamped
VIN. This number also appears on the Automobile Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your
VIN Location
INTRODUCTION 9
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY
ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . .
▫ Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Removing Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . .
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Tamper Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
䡵 ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Unlock The Doors. . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . . .22
. . . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . . .23
. . . . . . . . . . .24
. . . . . . . . . . .25
. . . . . . . . . . .26
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 䡵 WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .27
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
䡵 KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions . . . . .54
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .58
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .58
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .59
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
▫ Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .62 䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .108
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) — Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .70
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .74
. .108
. .108
. .109
. .110
. .112
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) with
integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob into
the ignition switch with either side up.
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three of
which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented
positions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON/RUN position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™
NOTE: With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the Elecfeature, refer to “Starting Procedures” in “Starting And
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display the
Operating” for further information.
ignition switch position (OFF/ACC/RUN). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired position. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1
2
3
4
— OFF
— ACC (ACCESSORY)
— ON/RUN
— START
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle on
the driver’s side should the battery in the vehicle or the
RKE transmitter go dead. The emergency key is also for
locking the glove box. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
NOTE: Entering a vehicle using the emergency key with
the security alarm armed, will result in the alarm sounding. Insert the Key Fob (even if the Key Fob battery is
dead) into the ignition switch to disarm security alarm.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch Removing Key Fob From Ignition
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the Key Fob to the
then pull the key out with your other hand.
OFF position and then remove the Key Fob.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, the EVIC will
display the ignition switch position “OFF/ACC/RUN”.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
• If you try to remove the Key Fob before you place the
shift lever in PARK, it may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch. If this occurs, rotate the key
to the right slightly, then remove the Key Fob as
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
Emergency Key Removal
the key in the ignition switch to warn you that this
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
and stopped, but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up
to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the
OFF position. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
• Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in this
condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob or
ignition module. Only remove the emergency key
for locking and unlocking the doors.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
• Jump Start the vehicle.
• Charge the battery.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
(Continued)
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove Key Fob from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when
the Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition
position.
With the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature, opening the
driver’s door when the vehicle’s ignition switch is placed
in ACC or ON/RUN (engine stopped) will cause the
reminder chime to sound. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system prevents unauthorresult in the engine being shut off after two seconds.
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
or unlocked.
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
The system uses the factory-mated Key Fob with Remote
as possible by an authorized dealer.
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
CAUTION!
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatsystem will shut the engine off in two seconds if an ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
SENTRY KEY姞
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN posi- problems and loss of security protection.
tion, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an authorized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
is one that has never been programmed.
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Replacement Keys
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
subject to the following conditions:
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is • This device may not cause harmful interference.
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
• This device must accept any interference that may be one should go off in the future, you will need to know
received, including interference that may cause unde- which mode has been activated in order to deactivate it.
sired operation.
Rearming The System
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors,
liftgate, and ignition for unauthorized operation. When
the alarm is activated, the interior switches for door locks
and power liftgate are disabled. The Vehicle Security
Alarm provides both audio and visual signals, the horn To Arm The System
will sound, the headlights will turn on, park lamps
and/or turn signals will flash repeatedly for three min- Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
utes. If the disturbance is still present (driver’s door, 1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to
passenger door, other doors, ignition) after three minutes,
⬙Starting Procedures⬙ in ⬙Starting And Operating⬙ for
the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals will flash
further information).
for an additional 15 minutes.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
NOTE: The Panic and Security alarms are quite differ- make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙.
ent. Please take a moment to activate the Panic and the
Security modes to hear the differences in the horn. In case
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, To Disarm The System
make sure the vehicle ignition system is ⬙OFF⬙ and the The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
key is physically removed from the ignition.
the following methods:
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the • Press the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
vehicle:
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• Press LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
equipped, refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
• Press the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the same
information).
exterior zone (refer to ⬙Keyless Enter-N-Go™⬙ in ⬙Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle⬙ for further infor- • Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
mation).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
• Press the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
press the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Start/Stop button
(RKE) transmitter.
(requires at least one valid Key Fob in the vehicle).
3. If any doors are open, close them.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the liftgate button
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Vehicle Security Alarm.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
power liftgate entry. Pressing the liftgate button will exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
not disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
Tamper Alert
door the alarm will sound.
NOTE:
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors. your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ- ILLUMINATED ENTRY
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate, or activate the panic alarm, from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Key Fob
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does not need
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
• The front courtesy overhead console and door cour- at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
tesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
the ⬙Dome ON⬙ position (extreme top position).
RKE transmitters.
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
NOTE:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Remote Unlock Sequence
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors, on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer- Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
Key Fob With Five-Button RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice to
unlock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash to
acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated entry
system will also turn on.
Flash Lamps With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lamps to flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE
transmitter. This feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Approach
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter or the Passive Entry
feature. The horn chirp feature can be turned on or off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To Lock The Doors
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, press and hold
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit- the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lamps will flash and second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
headlights turn on, the park lamps will flash, the horn
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further informa- The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
tion.
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time, or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
NOTE: The interior lights will turn off if you turn the 1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch at the top of the RKE transmitter sideways with
ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while
your thumb and then pull the key out with your other
the Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lamps
hand.
and horn will remain on.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
Emergency Key Removal
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a #2 flat blade
screwdriver into the slot and gently pry the two halves
of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage
the seal during removal.
Separating RKE Transmitter
Inserting Emergency Key Into Slot
3. Remove and replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the + sign on the battery to the + sign on
the inside of the battery clip, located on the back cover.
Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers.
Skin oils may cause battery deterioration. If you touch
a battery, clean it with rubbing alcohol.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
halves together.
General Information
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the 2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
following conditions:
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received, REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly apniently from outside the vehicle while still
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
maintaining security. The system has a range of
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic •
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
• Obstructions between the vehicle and RKE transmitter
•
may reduce this range.
•
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the •
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate/Flipper Glass closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
RKE PANIC button not pressed
System not disabled from previous remote start event
Vehicle theft alarm not active
Ignition in Off position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™
vehicle
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
programmed).
Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start premawill
remain
in
the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute
turely:
cycle.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds. Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
Remote Start mode.
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
• For security, power window and power sunroof op- button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Start request.
in the Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be Before the end of 15 minute cycle, press and release the
cycled by pushing the START/STOP button twice (or UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
press and release the START/STOP button. If the
third cycle.
START/STOP button is not present, insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch and turn the switch to the
ON/RUN position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-Nthrough the duration of remote start or until the ignition
Go™ feature, the ignition switch must be in the
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
ON/RUN position in order to drive the vehicle.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
• For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless Enter-Ndeactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Go™ feature, the message “Remote Start Active —
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Insert Key and Turn to Run” will display in the EVIC
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
until you insert the key. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Information Center (EVIC)” for further information.
Features (SETUP)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
• For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Panel”.
feature, the message “Remote Start Active — Push
Start Button” will display in the EVIC until you push DOOR LOCKS
the START button.
Manual Door Locks
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
The power door locks can be manually locked from
When remote start is activated, the heated steering inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob. To lock
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically each door, push the door lock knob on each door trim
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver panel downward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
NOTE:
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
inside door handle to the first detent. To unlock the rear
doors, pull the door lock knob on the door trim panel
upward. If the lock knob is down when the door is
closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
Manual Door Lock Knob
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
If you press the door lock switch while the Key Fob is in
the ignition switch and the driver’s door is open, the
The power door lock switch is located on each front door
doors will not lock.
panel. Press the switch to lock or unlock the doors.
If a rear door is locked, it cannot be opened from inside
the vehicle without first unlocking the door. The door
may be unlocked manually by raising the lock knob.
Power Door Locks
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer for
service.
Power Door Lock Switch
If the lock knob is down when the door is closed, the door
will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is not inside
the vehicle before closing the door.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Unlock On Exit Feature — If Equipped
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
If Auto Unlock is enabled, this feature will unlock all the
doors when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is
stopped and in PARK or NEUTRAL. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
press the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
• If a Passive Entry door handle has not been used for
approximately 72 hours, the Passive Entry feature for
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the handle may time out. Pulling the deactivated front
door handle will reactivate the door handle’s Passive
Entry feature.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the theft alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the driver’s front
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
Grabbing The Driver’s Door Handle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the driver’s
front door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if there is no Key Fob
present in the ignition.
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outNOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automatically. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Enter The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the liftgate, press the button on the right side of
the chrome accent bar, which is located on the liftgate
below the liftgate glass to lock or unlock the vehicle.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pressing the door
handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Liftgate Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
in EVIC, all doors will unlock when you push the button
on the liftgate. If ⬙Unlock Driver Door 1st press⬙ is
programmed in EVIC, the liftgate will unlock when you
press the button on the liftgate. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
2
The front door handles have LOCK buttons located on
the outside of the handles.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handle, press the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Outside Door Handle Lock Button
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
passenger door/rear doors which operates the front
passenger/rear passenger door windows. The window
• After pressing the door handle LOCK button, you
controls will operate only when the ignition switch is in
must wait 2 seconds before you can lock or unlock the
the ON/RUN or ACCESSORY position.
doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This is
done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by
pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
NOTE:
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on the driver’s
door trim panel. There is a single switch on the front
Power Window Switches
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
The power window switches remain active for up to 10 Auto Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection —
minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Driver And Front Passenger Door Only
Opening a vehicle front door will cancel this feature.
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switches
have an “Auto-Down” feature. Press the window switch
past the first detent, release, and the window will go
down automatically. To cancel the “Auto-Down” movement, operate the switch in either the up or down
direction and release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
Auto Up it will reverse direction and then go back down.
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Remove the obstacle and use the window switch again to
The power window switches remain active for 10 min- close the window. Any impact due to rough road condiutes after the ignition has been turned OFF. Opening tions may trigger the auto reverse function unexpectedly
either front door will cancel this feature.
during Auto Up. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to
the first detent and hold it to close the window manually.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Resetting The Auto Up Feature
Window Lockout Button
The Window Lockout button on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window controls on the rear doors. To
disable the window controls on the rear doors, press the
Window Lockout button. To enable the window controls,
press the Window Lockout button again.
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
probably needs to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Wind Buffeting
LIFTGATE
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of To open the liftgate, pull up on the handle and lift.
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the Manually unlocking the vehicle doors with the plunger
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the or a key in the lock cylinder will not unlock the liftgate.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
Liftgate Release
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep the
liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened by pulling
up on the liftgate handle or by pressing the
LIFTGATE button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter. Press the LIFTGATE button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds, to open
the power liftgate. Once the liftgate is open, pressing the
button twice within five seconds a second time will close
the liftgate. The power liftgate may also be opened and
closed with the overhead console switch.
Also, the power liftgate may be closed by pressing the
liftgate switch located on the left rear trim, near the
liftgate opening. Pressing once will close the liftgate only.
This button cannot be used to open the liftgate.
To operate the power liftgate manually in the open
direction, pull the liftgate handle once to initiate power
cycle and then pull the handle a second time to put
liftgate into manual mode.
When the LIFTGATE button on the RKE transmitter is
pressed two times, the turn signals will flash twice to
signal that the liftgate is opening or closing (if Flash
Lamps with Lock is enabled in the EVIC) and the liftgate
chime will be audible. For further information, refer to
“Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)/
Electronic Vehicle information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
NOTE:
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction to the liftgate, an • If anything obstructs the power liftgate while it is
emergency liftgate latch release can be used to open
closing or opening, the liftgate will automatically
the liftgate. The emergency liftgate latch release can be
reverse to the closed or open position, provided it
accessed through a snap-in cover located on the liftmeets sufficient resistance.
gate trim panel.
• There are also pinch sensors attached to the side of the
• If liftgate is left open for an extended period of time,
liftgate. Light pressure anywhere along these strips
the liftgate may need to be closed manually to reset
will cause the liftgate to return to the open position.
power liftgate functionality.
• The power liftgate must be in the full open position for
rear liftgate close button or overhead console close
WARNING!
button to operate. If the liftgate is not fully open, press
the Liftgate button on the Key Fob to fully open the
During power operation, personal injury or cargo
liftgate, and then press it again to close.
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is
clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed and latched • If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
before driving away.
is closing, the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the liftgate handle is pulled while the power liftgate
is opening, the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
• The power liftgate buttons will not operate if the
vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is above 0 mph
(0 km/h).
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures
below −22°F (−30°C) or temperatures above 150°F
(65°C). Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
from the liftgate before pressing any of the power
liftgate switches.
close. However, vehicle movement may result in a
detection of an obstruction.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple obstructions
within the same cycle, the system will automatically
stop and the liftgate must be opened or closed Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperamanually.
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put the opening the liftgate in cold weather.
vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
Some of the most important safety features in your • Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
vehicle are the restraint systems:
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• All seat belt systems (except the driver) include Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the seat
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
belt webbing into position by extending the belt all the
passenger
way out and then adjusting the belt to the desired
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
length to restrain a child seat or secure a large item in
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
a seat — if equipped
restraint)
Please pay close attention to the information in this
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
buckled up in a rear seat.
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
WARNING!
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
severity and type of collision.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that position.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under 5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
their arm.
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
WARNING!
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
(Continued)
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in an
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
Latch Plate
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the
latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make
the belt go around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
Latch Plate to Buckle
(Continued)
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be at the
strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat belt as
low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retracThe belt will automatically retract to its stowed positor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow it to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Removing Slack From Belt
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
from your neck. Press the release button to release the
anchorage, and then move it up or down to the position
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
that fits you best.
shoulder belt.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
In the front seating positions, the shoulder belt can be prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Driver
CRS Lock
N/A
ALR
Center
CRS Lock
N/A
N/A
Passenger
CRS Lock
ALR
ALR
First Row
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
Second Row
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
— Captains
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
Chair
position without pushing the release button. To verify the
Second Row
ALR
ALR
ALR
shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward on
Third
Row
ALR
N/A
ALR
the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
• N/A — Not Applicable
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) ALR and is being used for normal usage:
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re- Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort- 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) — If
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
Equipped
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode
anytime a child safety seat is installed in a seating
position that has a belt with this feature. Children 12
years old and under should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
WARNING!
• The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Refurther reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
These head restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the severwhether the severity, or type of rear impact will require ity and type of the impact.
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
CAUTION!
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
1 — Head Restraint Front Half
(Soft Foam and Trim)
2 — Seatback
3 — Head Restraint Back Half
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision,
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the
vehicle then down to engage the locking mechanism.
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
a comfortable position.
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
2
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
AHR In Reset Position
NOTE:
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock • If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
into the back decorative plastic half.
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints
checked by a qualified specialist at an authorized
dealer.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deacOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire tivating BeltAlert威.
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuBeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belt Extender
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts If a seat belt is too short, even when fully extended and
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
the best way to keep the baby safe.
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible. extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the exKeep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take tender and store it.
the force if there is a collision.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the lap belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug, and in the recommended seating
positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: The Driver and Front Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bags are certified to the new Federal regulations for
Advanced Air Bags.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on several factors, including the severity
and type of collision.
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE:
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
seat position.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Air Bag System Components
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag system components:
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
air bags, are located above the side windows and their • Air Bag Warning Light
covers are also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
• Steering Wheel and Column
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Instrument Panel
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
• Knee Impact Bolster
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch, is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
and Seat Track Position Sensors
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
NOTE:
for side-impact head injuries. The curtains deploy downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC air bags on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
• Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the SAB and SABIC air bags during
impacts that require side air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
SABIC, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high
enough to block the location of the SABIC. The
area where the side curtain air bag is located
should remain free from any obstructions.
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the
seat belt restraint system. Occupants, including
children who are up against or very close to SAB or
SABIC air bags can be seriously injured or killed.
Occupants, especially children, should not lean on
or sleep against the door, side windows, or area
where the SAB or SABIC air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint. Always sit
upright as possible with your back against the seat
back, use the seat belts properly, and use the
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight
of the child.
(Continued)
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occupants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags, and
front seat belt pretensioners, as required, depending on
several factors, including the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced
Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub- The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli- the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Adment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
especially applies to children.
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
(SABIC) Inflator Units
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
Inflator Units
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are dedeploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
are possible, based on several factors, including the
collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
SABIC. The inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of
the headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABIC inflates in about 30 milliseconds (about onequarter of the time that it takes to blink your eyes) with
enough force to injure you if you are not belted and
seated properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SABIC inflates. This especially applies to
children. The SABIC is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick
when it is inflated.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the ORC
in determining appropriate response to impact events.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the followBecause air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, ing functions:
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of • Cut off fuel to the engine.
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
until the ignition key is turned off.
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
• Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
the air bag system.
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have defront passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those bags will not be in place to protect you.
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) system serviced as well.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free. If any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly check
the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label located
on the inside of the fuse block cover for the proper air bag
fuses. See your authorized dealer if the fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large
for Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Children who are at least two years old or
who have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their rear-facing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are too
small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
out-grown the height or weight limit of
their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivepoint Harness, facing forward in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of
the vehicle
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12
years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
Captains Chairs Second Row
60/40 Second Row
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH
system once the combined weight is more
than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install
a child seat in the center seating position.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes, center position
only.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to install
a child seat in the center position next to a
child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
2
60/40 Seat LATCH Anchorages
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
strap anchorages behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted
floor panel away from the seat back, this will expose the
top tether strap anchorages.
Captains Chair LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat. To access the top tether
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top
Tether Strap
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH — Second Row Captains
Chairs
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating position.
Do not use the center lower LATCH anchorages to
install a child seat in the center of the back seat.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be restraint systems will be installed as described here.
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower Center Seat LATCH — Second Row 60/40
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the Do not install a child restraint in the center position using
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some the LATCH system. Use the seat belt and tether anchor to
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a install a child seat in the center seating position.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Vehicles With A Center Arm Rest Tether
For rearward facing infant seats secured in the center seat
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether
position with the vehicle seat belts, the rear center seat 2. Pull down on the tether to unhook it from the plastic
position has an armrest tether that secures the arm rest in
seat backing.
the upward position.
3. Raise the armrest and attach the tether hook to the
1. To access the center seat arm rest tether, first lower the
strap located on the front of the arm rest.
arm rest. The tether is located behind the armrest and
hooked onto the plastic seat backing.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
Center Seat Position Arm Rest Tether Attached
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seating position.
5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable AutoRestraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcmatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
tions to attach a tether anchor.
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can Restraints in this Vehicle
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
60/40 Second Row
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Captains Chairs Second Row
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight
limit of the child restraint.
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Yes, center position only.
Yes
In positions with cinching latch plates
(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted
up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle
stalk in a seating position with an ALR
retractor.
2
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webbetter fit.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
against the child seat.
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
attach a tether anchor.
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click.”
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
in any direction.
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
vehicle seat.
Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
2
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Anchorage
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position (see the
charts above), move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn 2. To access the top tether strap anchorages behind the
rear seat, pull the carpeted floor panel away from the
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
seat back, this will expose the top tether strap anchorinto the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
ages.
restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
2
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel
To Access Top Tether Strap
Top Tether Strap Anchorage (Located on Seatback)
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
4. For the center seating position, route the tether strap
over the seatback and headrest then attach the hook to
the tether anchor located on the back of the seat.
5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Top Tether Strap Mounting (60/40 Seat)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
The top tether anchorages are not visible until the
gap panel is folded down. Do not use the visible
cargo tie down hooks, located on the floor behind the
seats, to attach a child restraint tether anchor.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage — Center Seating Position
Top Tether Strap Mounting (Captain’s Chair)
For center seating position route the tether strap over the
seatback and headrest then attach the hook to the tether
anchor located on the back of the seat.
6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
2
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri- SAFETY TIPS
mental and should be avoided.
Transporting Passengers
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
AREA.
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
2
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
system.
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is Air Bag Warning Light
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the comThe light should come on and remain on for
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
not lit during starting, see your authorized
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Defroster
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Vehicle
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
Seat Belts
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts, feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperimmediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system. able.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Floor Mat Safety Information
WARNING! (Continued)
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
2
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
Tires
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .121
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
▫ Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped . . . . . . . .124
䡵 BLIND SPOT MONITORING —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
▫ Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
䡵 Uconnect威 Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .133
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect威
Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .163
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .172
▫ Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
▫ 60/40 Split Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
▫ Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .187
▫ Folding Third Row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
䡵 DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .192
▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .198
䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .201
▫ Headlights On Automatically With Wipers . . .201
▫ SmartBeam™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .203
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ Ambient Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ High/Low Beam Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .210
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Windshield Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
▫ Mist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
䡵 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .213
䡵 TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .215
䡵 POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
䡵 HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .218
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .224
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .225
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ ParkSense威 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense威 . . . . . . . .253
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .231
▫ Service The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .233
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .235
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .237
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode . . .241
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense威 System . . . . . . . . . .254
▫ ParkSense威 System Usage Precautions . . . . . . .255
䡵 PARKVIEW威 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
▫ Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped. . . .243
▫ Turning ParkView威 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .259
䡵 PARKSENSE威 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
▫ Turning ParkView威 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ ParkSense威 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 䡵 OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
▫ ParkSense威 Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
▫ Front Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Courtesy Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
▫ Sunglasses Bin Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .271
䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .262
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink威. . .264
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button . .266
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .266
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button . .267
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .268
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button . .269
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .269
▫ Ignition OFF Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .275 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .280
▫ Rechargeable Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
䡵 CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Cargo Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
▫ Retractable Cargo Area
Cover — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Front Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285
▫ Rear Full Center Console (If Equipped) . . . . . .287
▫ Rear Mini Center Console (If Equipped) . . . . .290
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .296
▫ Deploying the Crossbars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
▫ Stowing the Crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
Outside
Mirrors
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield). To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
WARNING!
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than
they really are. Relying too much on your passenger
side convex mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the passenger side convex mirror. Some vehicles
will not have a convex passenger side mirror.
3
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
in the button will illuminate to indicate when the dimming feature is activated. The mirror is twisted on the
windshield button counterclockwise and requires no
tools for mounting.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors — If
Equipped
The drivers outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirrors will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved either
forward or rearward to resist damage. The hinges have Power Mirrors
three detent positions:
The power mirror switch is located on the driver’s side
door trim panel.
• full forward
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but• full rearward and
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press the mirror select button for the mirror that
• normal.
you want to adjust. Using the mirror control switch, press
on any of the four arrows for the direction that you want
the mirror to move.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Tilt Mirrors In Reverse (Available With Memory
Seat Only) — If Equipped
Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror
positioning which will aid the drivers view of the ground
Power Mirror Switch
rearward of the front doors. Outside mirrors will move
1 — Mirror Direction Control
slightly downward from the present position when the
2 — Mirror Selection
vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will
Power mirror preselected positions can be controlled by then return to the original position when the vehicle is
the optional Memory Seat Feature. Refer to “Driver shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored memory
Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your setting will have an associated Tilt Mirrors in Reverse
position.
Vehicle” for further information.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not enabled
when delivered from the factory. The Tilt Mirrors in
Reverse feature can be enabled or disabled in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/CustomerProgrammable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down one of
the visors.
Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn on
automatically.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Extension — If Equipped
This feature has a pull out extension on the sun visor for
increased coverage.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
BLIND SPOT MONITORING — IF EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarbased sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
be momentarily illuminated in both outside rear view
mirrors to let the driver know that the system is operational. The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle
is in any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand by
mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
on both sides of the vehicle (11 ft or 3.35 m). The zone
starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends approximately 20 ft (6 m) to the rear of the vehicle. The BSM
system monitors the detection zones on both sides of the
vehicle when the vehicle speed has reached approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
Rear Detection Zones
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the detection zones.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumThe BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
3
BSM Warning Light
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (Side, Rear, Front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Side Monitoring
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Entering From The Rear
Overtaking Traffic
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking/Approaching
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
3
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
Stationary Objects
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicles
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
Opposing Traffic
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
driver when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately 1 to
2 mph (1 km/h to 3 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of approximately 10 mph (16 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Modes Of Operation
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and deBlind Spot Alert
tected object are present on the same side at the same
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) will also be
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when muted.
the system is operating in RCP, the system will respond
with both visual and audible alerts when a detected NOTE:
object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, • Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
the radio is muted.
system, the radio is also muted.
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
is also muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored; the
RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
display the message “ Blind spot system unavailableAstronomy zone”. The side mirrors LED’s will be lit up
and stay lit until the vehicle exits the zone.
Uconnect姞 Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone allows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ “Work” or “Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect威 Phone.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, VerAstronomy Zone — System Temporarily Unavailable
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect威 website for supWhen the vehicle enters this zone the blind spot system
ported phones.
will become temporarily unavailable and the EVIC will
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For
Uconnect威
customer
support,
visit
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400.
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to
seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. All attention should be focused on safely operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect威 Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect威 Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect威 followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect威 Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect威 website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect威 Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect威 Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
To activate the Uconnect威 Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to referthe beep. The Uconnect威 Phone will play some of the
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
Uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
The following are general phone to Uconnect威 Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phones to your Uconnect威 Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
connected to your Uconnect威 System. The priority
allows the Uconnect威 Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect威 Phone will use the priority three mobile
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect威 Phone a name for your mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect威 Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
“Call”.
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
person you want to call.
website for supported phones.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call a name from the Uconnect威 Phonebook or
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previby Saying a Name” section.
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect威 phonebook
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins • This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transmade to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you
ferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next
start the vehicle.
phone connection.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected Add Names To Your Uconnect威 Phonebook
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect威 Phonebook is
• Depending on the maximum number of entries down- recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
button to begin.
• Press the
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
able for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile • When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recomphone is accessible.
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
instead of “Bob”.
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g., Edit Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
NOTE:
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
book entry, if desired.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
phonebook entry that you are adding.
deleted or edited.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more • Press the
button to begin.
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
The Uconnect威 Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
entry that you wish to edit.
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible • Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
supported by your phone, Uconnect威 Phone automati• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
phonebook entry that you are editing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
to the main menu.
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the
button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect威 Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete”.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect威 Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
button to begin.
• Press the
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will ask you to verify that you
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
butwish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
ton during the playing of the desired name, and say
“Call”.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language operations at this point.
is deleted.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• The selected number will be dialed.
List All Names In The Uconnect威 Phonebook
Phone Call Features
• Press the
button to begin.
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service mobile phone. Press the
button to place the current
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be call on hold and answer the incoming call.
accessed through the Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
Currently In Progress
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
button to accept the call. To reject the call,
Press the
button until you hear a single beep,
press and hold the
indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Currently In Progress
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
If a call is currently in progress and you have another to “Conference Call” in this section.
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
butbring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ton until you hear a single beep.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatCall Termination
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
butswitched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
Conference Call
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
button until you hear a hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
joined into one conference call.
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Redial
• Press the
button to begin.
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect威 Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• After the ignition key is cycled to OFF, a call can
“Redial”.
continue on the Uconnect威 Phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
• The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
from the Uconnect威 Phone to the mobile phone.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the • An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is cycled to OFF.
Uconnect威 Phone.
Uconnect姞 Phone Features
Call Continuation
Language Selection
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
To change the language that the Uconnect威 Phone is
Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
using:
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality availbutton to begin.
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• Press the
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect威 Phone either until the call
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is
the name of the language you wish to switch to operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the •
language selection.
•
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect威 Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE: After every Uconnect威 Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not language- NOTE:
specific and is usable across all languages.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
Emergency Assistance
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
reachable:
area.
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
• If supported, this number may be programmable on • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Roadside Assistance”.
button and say
some systems. To do this, press the
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528for the mobile phone directly.
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
WARNING!
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside
Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in the WarTo use you Uconnect威 Phone System in an emerranty Information Booklet and the Roadside Assisgency, your mobile phone must be:
tance references.
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect威 System,
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• and have network coverage.
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
Roadside Assistance
“Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
If you need roadside assistance:
Paging
• Press the
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
button to begin.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
button and say the sequence you wish to enter,
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to
work properly with the Uconnect威 Phone.
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
Voice Mail Calling
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.
can press the
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working Saying a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by
with Automated Systems”.
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure, and
Working With Automated Systems
to leave a number on a pager.
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while You can also send stored Uconnect威 phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
navigating through an automated telephone system.
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail call and then press the
button and say, “Send.” The
system or an automated service, such as a paging service system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
or automated customer service line. Some services re- say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
quire immediate response selection. In some instances, The Uconnect威 Phone will then send the corresponding
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone.
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
NOTE:
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
• You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect威 Phone
network configurations. This is normal.
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
button to begin.
out settings that are too short and may not allow the • Press the
use of this feature.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
one of the following:
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect威 Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
using Uconnect威 Phone. The status is given for network Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
button.
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise • Press the
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s In order to un-mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
button.
• Press the
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
• Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle Advanced Phone Connectivity
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situaTransfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be transprogress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
audio.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
from your Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile phone to the • When prompted, say “List Phones”.
button and
Uconnect威 Phone or vice versa, press the
• The Uconnect威 Phone will play the phone names of all
say “Transfer Call”.
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
being announced, press the
button and say “SeUconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
lect”
or
“Delete”.
Also,
see
the
next
two sections for an
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
alternate
way
to
“Select”
or
“Delete”
a paired phone.
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
Select Another Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between your mobile phone and the phone paired with the Uconnect威 Phone.
Uconnect威 Phone System, follow the instructions debutton to begin.
• Press the
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
button at any time while the
• You can also press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
you wish to select.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect威 Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect威 Phone Paired Mobile Phones
• Press the
button to begin.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
Phone
Uconnect威 Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect威
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
prompts.
button at any time while the From outside the Uconnect威 Phone mode (e.g., from
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you radio mode):
wish to delete.
button for five seconds until
• Press and hold the
the session begins, or,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training”, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect威 Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect威 Phone. For
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect威 Phone Local) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac- • You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
cents, the system may not always work for some.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
• When navigating through an automated system such
number combinations may not be supported.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
Far End Audio Performance
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• Audio quality is maximized under:
in the Uconnect威 Phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
SMS
Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness If you receive a new text message while your phone is
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and connected to Uconnect威 Phone, an announcement will be
not the Uconnect威 Phone.
made to notify you that you have a new text message. If
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced you wish to hear the new message:
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
button.
• Press the
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
compromised with the convertible top down.
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
Recent Calls
• Uconnect威 Phone will play the new text message for
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Downyou.
load”, Uconnect威 Phone can list your Outgoing, IncomAfter reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
ing and Missed Calls.
the message using Uconnect威 Phone.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages:
3. Where are you?
You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send 4.
a new message:
5.
button.
• Press the
6.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
7.
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
8.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
9.
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
I need more direction.
LOL
Why
I love you
Call me
button while the 10.
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
11.
Uconnect威 Phone will prompt you to say the name or
12.
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
13.
List of Preset Messages:
14.
1. Yes
15.
2. No
Call me later
Thanks
See You in 15 minutes
I am on my way
I’ll be late
Are you there yet?
Where are we meeting?
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
16. Can this wait?
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
17. Bye for now
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
sages.
system.
button.
• Press the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect威 Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disc player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB Mass Storage Class device, iPod family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys• This device must accept any interference received,
tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. All attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
command.
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen for set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Commands
main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands:
times. Local commands are available if the supported
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing The Volume
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth威
Streaming mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM (Or Radio Long Wave Or Radio
Medium Wave — If Equipped)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
Satellite Radio
this mode, you may say the following commands:
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Disc Mode
Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list a Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
USB Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
this mode, you may say the following commands:
may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
one of the following commands:
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Save” (to save the memo)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Change to setup”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Language Dutch”
System Setup
• “Language Deutsch”
• “Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the • “Language Italian”
following:
• “Tutorial”
• “Change to system setup”
• “Voice Training”
• “Main menu system setup”
• “Switch to system setup”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice SEATS
button first and wait for the beep before Seats are part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Command
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
vehicle.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect威
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
button, say “System
1. Press the Voice Command
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect威 Voice. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with eight-way power
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switches
are located on the outboard side of the seat. There are two
switches that control the movement of the seat cushion
and the seatback.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Seatback Switch
2 — Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position has been reached.
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position has been reached.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas- the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the the direction of the switch. Release the switch when the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control desired position has been reached.
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward. may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
when the desired position has been reached.
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/Rearward
the switch will raise and lower the position of the Adjustment
support.
Some models may be equipped with a manual front
passenger seat. The passenger seat can be adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar located by the front of
the seat cushion, near the floor.
Power Lumbar Switch
Adjustment Bar
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located under
the seat cushion and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the desired
position. Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters
have latched.
Manual Front Passenger Seatback Adjustment —
Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Recline Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
Front Passenger Seat Fold-Flat Feature — If
Equipped
To fold the seatback to the flat load-floor position, lift the
recline lever and push the seatback forward. To return to
the seating position, raise the seatback and lock it into
place.
Fold-Flat Passenger Seat
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
3
Rear Heated Seat Switches
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
with heated seats. There are two heated seat switches that
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
allow the rear passengers to operate the seats independently. The heated seat switches for each heater are
located on the rear of the center console.
Rear Heated Seats
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compartNOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
within two to five minutes.
in higher ambient temperatures.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes There are two ventilated seat switches that allow the
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the driver and passenger to operate the seats independently.
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected, The ventilated seat switches are located on the switch
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At below the climate controls.
that time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from
The ventilated seat switches are used
two to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting
to control the speed of the fans located
will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minin the seat. Press the switch once to
utes.
choose HIGH, press it a second time to
choose LOW. Pressing the switch a
third time will turn the ventilated seat
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
OFF. When HIGH speed is selected both lights on the
switch will be illuminated. When LOW speed is selected
one light will be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s ventilated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable compoVehicle” for further information.
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
Head Restraints
identified by any markings, only through visual inspecHead restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear- in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Push Button
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and rearward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
3
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
Active Head Restraint (Tilted)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Head Restraints — Rear Seats
The head restraints on the outboard seats are not adjustable. They automatically fold forward when the rear seat
is folded to a load floor position but do not return to their
normal position when the rear seat is raised. After
returning either seat to its upright position, raise the head
restraint until it locks in place. The outboard headrests
are not removable.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
The center head restraint has limited adjustment. Lift
upward on the head restraint to raise it, or push downward on the head restraint to lower it.
WARNING!
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its lowered
position could result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Always make sure the outboard head restraints are in their upright positions when the seat is
to be occupied.
NOTE: For proper routing of a Child Seat Tether refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Head Restraint
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Folding Third Row Head Restraints
60/40 Split Rear Seat
For improved visibility when in reverse, the third row Fold-Flat
head restraints can be folded using a switch, located on
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
the instrument panels switch bank.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
Press the power folding switch located
side of the seat.
on the instrument panel to fold the
head restraints.
NOTE:
• The head restraints can only be folded downward
using the power folding switch. The head restraints
must be raised manually when occupying the third
row.
• Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the third
row seats.
Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
3
Fold-Flat Second Row Seat
Easy Access For Third Row
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Release Lever
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Tumbled Second Row
Tumble Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
Rear Captain Chairs — If Equipped
Fold-Flat
The second row seats can be folded flat to carry cargo.
Pull upward on the release lever located on the outboard
side of the seat.
To Raise Rear Seat
Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Release Lever
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Second Row Seats
Release Lever
2. Tumble the seat forward using the pull strap located
behind the seatback.
Either side of the rear seat can be tumbled forward to
allow passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Easy Access For Third Row
1. Pull upward on the release lever to release the seat.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the second row seats in
the tumbled position. The second row seats are only
intended to be tumbled for entry and exit to the third
row seat. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury.
Tumble Strap
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. If your vehicle is equipped with a mini console there is To Raise Rear Seat
a stepping pad to allow passengers to easily access the Tumbled the seat rearward and lock it into place.
third row seats.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Mini Console Stepping Pad
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Folding Third Row
Both third row seats can be folded forward to increase the
cargo area. To lower either seat pull on the release handle
located on back of the seat and lower the seat using the
pull strap located next to the release handle.
3
Third Row Folded
NOTE: The second row seats must be in their full
upright position, or tumbled when folding the third row
seats.
Release Handles
To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using the strap
located on the back of the seat.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE transmitters. One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to
either memory position. The memory system can accommodate up to four RKE transmitters, each one linked to
either of the two memory positions.
The memory seat switch is located on the driver’s door
trim panel. The switch consists of three buttons:
• The (S) button, which is used to activate the memory
save function
This feature allows the driver to store up to two different
memory profiles for easy recall through a memory • The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall either
of two pre-programmed memory profiles.
switch. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable
pedals (if equipped), and power tilt and telescopic steering column (if equipped) and a set of desired radio
station presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter can also be programmed to recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Programming The Memory Feature
NOTE: To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine).
Memory Seat Switch
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
switch.
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the NOTE:
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a
memory position has been set.
memory profile.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go
• The Recall Memory with Remote Linked to Memory
1. Insert the ignition key fob, and turn the ignition switch
feature can be enabled through the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
to the ON/RUN position.
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired preferFeatures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
ences (i.e., seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals [if
for further information.
equipped], power tilt and telescopic steering column
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry
[if equipped], and radio station presets).
Transmitter To Memory
3. Press and release the S (Set) button on the memory
Your RKE transmitters can be programmed to recall one
switch.
of two pre-programmed memory profiles by pressing the
4. Within 5 seconds, press and release either of the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter.
memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) will display which
memory position has been set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
NOTE: Before programming your RKE transmitters you 3. Once the profile has been recalled, press and release
must select the “Remote Linked to Memory” feature
the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then press
and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory
through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument
(EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC.
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE
To program your RKE transmitters, perform the followtransmitter within 10 seconds.
ing:
NOTE: Your RKE transmitters can be unlinked to your
1. Remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or change the memory settings by pressing the SET (S) button followed
ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Keyless by the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter in Step 4
Enter-N-Go).
above.
2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
refer to ⬙Programming The Memory Feature⬙ for instruc- positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
tions on how to set a memory profile.
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 2.
memory switch , press MEMORY button number 1 on
NOTE: When recall is requested with the RKE transmitthe driver’s door memory switch.
ter and the Easy Entry/Exit Seat is turned ON, the seat
• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the
will go to the Easy Entry position. When the ignition is
RKE transmitter, press the UNLOCK button on the
placed in the ON/RUN position, the seat will then
RKE transmitter linked to memory position 1.
automatically return to the set memory position.
NOTE: When recall is requested with the RKE transmit- A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
ter and the Easy Entry/Exit Seat is turned ON, the seat MEMORY buttons on the drivers door during a recall (S,
will go to the Easy Entry position. When the ignition is 1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
placed in the ON/RUN position, the seat will then driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
automatically return to the set memory position.
one second will occur before another recall can be
Driver One Memory Position Recall
Driver Two Memory Position Recall
selected.
• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the Easy Entry/Exit Seat
memory switch, press MEMORY button number 2 on This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
the driver’s door memory switch.
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
will return to its previously set position when you
The distance the driver seat moves depends on where
place the ignition to the ACC or RUN position.
you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the
Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,
• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the
for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).
driver seat position is less than 0.9 in (22.7 mm)
forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or
benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with
or Easy Entry.
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about
2.4 in (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position is Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
greater than or equal to 2.7 in (67.7 mm) forward of the Entry and Easy Exit position.
rear stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the ignition into the ACC or NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
RUN position.
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
position 0.3 in (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if the Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
driver seat position is between 0.9 in and 2.7 in (22.7 further information.
mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear stop. The seat
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
2. Reach under the hood from outside the vehicle, move
the safety latch to the left and lift the hood.
1. Pull the release lever located below the instrument
panel and in front of the driver’s door.
Safety Latch Location
Hood Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
CAUTION!
WARNING!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the center of
the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The headlight switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Headlight Switch
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is
on the parking lights, taillights, license plate
light and instrument panel lights are also
turned on. To turn off the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch back to the O (Off) position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
NOTE:
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
• Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and
fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic
is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the A (AUTO) position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
• To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses 90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
solution followed by rinsing.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On Automatically With Wipers
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic Headlights, it
also has this customer-programmable feature. When
your headlights are in the automatic mode and the
engine is running, they will automatically turn on when
the wiper system is on. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable SmartBeam™ — If Equipped
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for The SmartBeam™ system provides increased forward
further information.
lighting at night by automating high beam control
If your vehicle is equipped with a “Rain Sensitive Wiper through the use of a digital camera mounted on the
System” and it is activated, the headlights will automati- inside rearview mirror. This camera detects vehicle specally turn on after the wipers complete five wipe cycles cific light and automatically switches from high beams to
within approximately one minute, and they will turn off low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
approximately four minutes after the wipers completely
NOTE:
stop. Refer to “Windshield Wipers and Washers” in this
• If the windshield or SmartBeam™ mirror is replaced,
section for further information.
the SmartBeam™ mirror must be re-aimed to ensure
NOTE: When your headlights come on during the dayproper performance. See your local authorized dealer.
time, the instrument panel lights will automatically dim
to the lower nighttime intensity. Refer to “Lights” in this • Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
section for further information.
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions (sticker, toll box, etc.) on the
windshield or camera lens will cause the system to
function improperly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
To Activate
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
1. Enable the Automatic High Beams. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer- Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your In- The Daytime Running Lights (low intensity) come on
strument Panel” for further information.
whenever the engine is running, and the transmission is
2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight not in the PARK position. The lights will remain on until
the ignition is switched to the OFF or ACC position or the
position.
parking brake is engaged. The headlight switch must be
3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward used for normal nighttime driving.
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
Headlight Delay
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
To Deactivate
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
operation of low beams).
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument
panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.
To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch
back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Fog Light Operation
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
switch to the parking light or headlight position and An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odomthe headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
to its farthest position up until you hear a click. This
high beam is selected.
feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when
Interior Lights
headlights are required during the day.
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the right side of the headlight switch) is rotated
to the its farthest upward position, or if equipped, when
the UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter. When a door is open and the
interior lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the
way down, to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior
lights to go out. This is also known as the “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for extended
periods of time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control up (brighter) or
down (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
Dimmer Control
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when Front Map/Reading Lights
the driver’s door is opened.
The front map/reading lights are mounted in the overhead console.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10
minutes or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up
to the dome ON position for 10 minutes, the interior
lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
Front Map/Reading Lights
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Each light can be turned on by pressing a switch on either
side of the console. These buttons are backlit for night
time visibility. To turn the lights off, press the switch a
second time. The lights will also turn on when the
UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
3
Courtesy Lights
Front Map/Reading Light Switches
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Ambient Light
Multifunction Lever
The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil- steering column.
ity of the floor center console and PRNDL area.
Multifunction Lever
Ambient Light
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Turn Signals
Flash-To-Pass
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steerproper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights. ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside High/Low Beam Switch
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
defective.
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the
multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column. The front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first four detent
positions for intermittent settings, the fifth detent for low
wiper operation and the sixth detent for high wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Multifunction Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
“park” position. If the windshield wiper switch is
turned off, and the blades cannot return to the “park”
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
Intermittent Wiper System
Use one of the four intermittent wiper settings when
weather conditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable delay between cycles, desirable. At driving
Intermittent Wiper Operation
speeds above 10 mph (16 km/h), the delay can be
NOTE:
If
the
vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
(16
km/h),
delay
times will be doubled.
between cycles (first detent), to a cycle every one second
(fourth detent).
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, push on the end of the lever (toward
the steering wheel) and hold while spray is desired. If the
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
lever is pushed while in the intermittent setting, the If the end of the lever is pushed while the wipers are in
wipers will turn on and operate for several wipe cycles the off position, the wipers will operate for several wipe
after the end of the lever is released, and then resume the cycles, then turn off.
intermittent interval previously selected.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Windshield Washer Operation
Use the Mist feature when weather conditions make
occasional usage of the wipers necessary. Rotate the end
of the lever downward to the Mist position and release
for a single wiping cycle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensitive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Settings 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
OFF position when not using the system.
Mist Control
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
3
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the
windshield.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside temperature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
• Use of Rain-X威 or products containing wax or silicone • Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEUTRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not
• A customer programmable feature in the Electronic
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) allows the Rain
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the shift lever is
Sensing feature to be turned off. Refer to “Electronic
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understand- Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has placed
wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain sensing
following conditions:
wiper operation can resume, if it has been selected, and
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the lever downward
(toward the floor). To tilt the steering column, move the
steering wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the
steering column in position, push the lever upward until
fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
3
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
desired.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat,
you can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel
to return the tilt/telescopic steering column to preprogrammed positions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”
in this section for further information.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
3
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elecright side of the steering wheel.
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
3
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle To Vary The Speed Setting
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inand release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
operate at the selected speed.
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed increase until the button is released, then the new set
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
To Deactivate
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
WARNING!
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
WARNING! (Continued)
– Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped
vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
– Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
– Does not predict the lane curvature or the movement of preceding vehicles and will not compensate for such changes.
– Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
– Can only apply a maximum of 25% of the vehicle’s braking capability, and will not bring the
vehicle to a complete stop.
WARNING!
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
• Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
3
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising
at a constant preset speed. For additional information,
refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode”
in this section.
NOTE: The system will not react to preceding vehicles.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
Always confirm which mode is selected.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
1 — DISTANCE SETTING
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
RES +
SET CANCEL
ON/OFF
MODE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension modifications to the ve- NOTE: You cannot enable ACC under the following
hicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive Cruise conditions:
Control.
• When in Four-Wheel Drive Low.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When you apply the brakes.
You can only activate ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the parking brake is set.
18 mph (30 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state, • When the automatic transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or NEUTRAL.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) displays “Adaptive Cruise Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the EVIC displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off.”
• When pushing the RES + button without a previously
set speed in memory.
3
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the ON/OFF
Push and release the ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in button again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the EVIC will display “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
the EVIC displays “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
To Activate
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
3
ACC Set
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the EVIC.
Driver Override
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If ACC is resumed or set with the ESC/TCS off,
The system will disable ACC without erasing the ESC will automatically be re-engaged.
memory if:
To Cancel
• You softly tap the brake pedal.
• You depress the brake pedal.
• You press the CANCEL switch.
• The speed of the vehicle goes below 15 mph
(25 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The transmission is shifted into NEUTRAL.
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
Adaptive Cruise Control Cancelled
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the ON/OFF button.
• You turn OFF the ignition.
• You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low.
To Resume Speed
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
Press the RES + button and release. Then remove your To Vary The Speed Setting
foot from the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
last set speed.
pressing and holding the RES + button. If the button is
NOTE: You can resume ACC from a minimum of continually pressed, the set speed will continue to increase in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is
20 mph (30 km/h).
released. The increase in set speed is reflected in the EVIC
display.
3
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Pressing the RES + button once will result in a 1 mph NOTE:
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
• When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
sufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
pressing and holding the SET - button. If the button is
will automatically slow the vehicle.
continually pressed, the set speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph (8 km/h) increments until the button is • The ACC system can only apply a maximum of 25% of
the vehicle’s braking capability and will not bring the
released. The decrease in set speed is reflected in the
vehicle to a complete stop.
EVIC display.
Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This is normal operation and necessary to maintain set speed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between 3 (long), 2 (medium), and 1 (short). Using this distance setting and the
vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the distance to the
vehicle ahead. This distance setting displays in the EVIC.
3
Distance Setting 2
Distance Setting 3
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
same lane, the EVIC displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of
the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
speed.
• The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
• The vehicle ahead slows to a speed below 15 mph
(24 km/h) and the system automatically disengages
itself.
To change the distance setting, press the Distance button
and release. Each time the button is pressed, the distance
• The distance setting is changed.
setting adjusts between long, medium, and short.
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
ACC Activation).
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
Distance Setting 1
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the EVIC and a chime will sound
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
capacity. When this occurs, you should immediately
apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle ahead.
The ACC Systems provides Overtake Aid when passing
on the left hand side only. When driving with ACC
engaged and following a Target vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration based on your current
speed. The acceleration is triggered by indicating a left
turn signal.
3
Brake Alert
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The EVIC displays the current ACC system settings. The
EVIC is located in the upper part of the instrument
cluster between the speedometer and the tachometer. The
information it displays depends on ACC system status.
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Menu Button
Press the MENU button (located on the steering wheel) repeatedly until one of the following displays in the EVIC:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
– When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
– When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting
has not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive
Cruise Control Ready.”
ACC SET
Example Only
The ACC screen will display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
– When ACC is set, the set speed will display.
• Set Speed Change
– The set speed will continue to display in place of the
odometer reading when changing the EVIC display • Distance Setting Change
while ACC is set.
• System Cancel
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
• Driver Override
•
•
•
•
The “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” message
can sometimes be displayed while driving in highly
System Off
reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and
snow). The ACC system will recover after the vehicle has
ACC Proximity Warning
left these areas. Under rare conditions, when the radar is
ACC Unavailable Warning
not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
The EVIC will return to the last display selected after warning may temporarily occur.
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle” Warning
The ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
warning will display when conditions temporarily limit
system performance. This most often occurs at times of
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC
system may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these cases, the
EVIC will display “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” and the system will deactivate.
Clean Radar Sensor Warning
3
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If the ACC “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of • If the sensor is damaged due to a collision, see your
Vehicle” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
authorized dealer for service.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
• Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
section.
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
malfunction.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
When the condition that deactivated the system is no
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
vehicle behind the lower grille.
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- simply reactivating it.
tant to note the following maintenance items:
NOTE:
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
• If the “Clean Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
message occurs frequently (e.g. more than once on
the sensor lens.
every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or other
obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at your
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so
authorized dealer.
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
require a sensor realignment.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC operation.
ACC Unavailable Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating ACC again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Service ACC Warning
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
3
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adding A Trailer Hitch
The weight of a trailer/hitch may affect the performance
of ACC. If there is a noticeable change in performance
following the installation of a trailer/hitch, or if the ACC
performance does not return to normal after removing
the trailer/hitch see your authorized dealer.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel. There will not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle
may move in and out of the line of travel, which can
cause your vehicle to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
convenience reasons, with no target vehicle detected.
Once the vehicle is out of the curve the system will
resume your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal
ACC system functionality.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
3
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC will not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC will not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There will not be sufficient
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
have moved fully into the lane. There will not be suffi- attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a normal
(fixed speed) Cruise Control mode is available for cruising at fixed speeds. The normal Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruise Control
can only be operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(32 km/h).
General Information
FCC Requirements For Vehicular Radar Systems
Classification Specifications:
47 C.F.R. Part 15
47 C.F.R Part 15.515
To change between the different cruise modes, press the
MODE button when the system is in either the OFF,
READY or SET state. Pressing of the MODE button in any
state will result in changing to the new Mode in the OFF
state.
3
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To Set A Desired Speed
To Vary The Speed Setting
There are two ways to change the set speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to adjust the vehicle to the
desired speed and press the SET - button.
• Tap the RES + or SET - button to increase or decrease
the set speed in 1 mph (1.6 km/h) increments respectively. Hold the RES + or SET - button for 5 mph
(8 km/h) increments.
To Cancel
The system will disable normal Cruise Control without
erasing the memory if:
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, press the
• You softly tap or depress the brake pedal.
SET - button and release. The EVIC will display the set
speed.
• You press the CANCEL button.
NOTE: You must observe the display when setting or • The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Syschanging speed, not the speedometer.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
To Resume
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
Press the RES + button and then remove your foot from The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
the accelerator pedal. The EVIC will display the last set the driver with audible and visual warnings (within the
speed.
EVIC) when it detects a potential frontal collision. The
warnings are intended to provide the driver with enough
To Turn Off
time to react and avoid the potential collision.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• You push the ON/OFF button.
• You turn off the ignition.
• You engage Four-Wheel Drive Low.
If the Cruise Control system is turned off and reactivated,
the system will return to the last driver setting (ACC or
Normal Cruise Control).
3
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking
sensor as well as the Electronic Brake Controller (EBC),
wheel speed sensors, i.e., to calculate a probable rear-end
collision. When the system determines that a rear-end
collision is probable a warning message (both audible
and visual) will be displayed on the EVIC. When the
system determines a collision with the vehicle in front of
you is no longer probable, the warning message will be
deactivated.
FCW Message
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 10 mph
(16 km/h).
• When entering or driving in a curve, the FCW alerts
may be triggered on objects other than vehicles such as
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
guard rails or sign posts based on the course predic- FCW settings can only be changed when the vehicle is in
tion. This is expected and is a part of normal FCW PARK.
activation and functionality.
The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting, this allows
WARNING!
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
vehicle in front of you when you are farther away. This
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to gives you the most reaction time.
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of collision. The driver has the responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle
via braking and steering. Failure to follow this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature can be set to far, set to near or turned off
in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. The FCW Status Off, Near or Far will be
displayed in the EVIC.
Example Only
3
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This in front of you.
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
Example Only
Example Only
NOTE: In the “Off” setting FCW OFF will be displayed
in the EVIC.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
of the car, stationary objects that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or higher
rate of speed.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC below with the unavailable screens.
FCW Unavailable Warning
FCW Off Example
NOTE:
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
FCW Unavailable, Vehicle System Error”, there may be a
temporary malfunction that limits FCW functionality.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under normal
conditions, FCW will be temporarily unavailable. If this
occurs, try activating FCW again later, following a key
cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
Service FCW Warning
driver after ignition shut down.
If the system turns off, and the EVIC displays “ACC/
• FCW will not react to irrelevant objects such as over- FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor”, it indicates
head objects, ground reflections, objects not in the path
3
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
there is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is ParkSense威 can be active only when the shift lever is in
still drivable under normal conditions, have the system REVERSE. If ParkSense威 is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer.
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
PARKSENSE姞 REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
EQUIPPED
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
The ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist system provides visual 10 mph (16 km/h).
and audible indications of the distance between the rear ParkSense姞 Sensors
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威 System The four ParkSense威 sensors, located in the rear fascia/
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
recommendations.
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
ParkSense威 will retain the last system state (enabled or (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is direction, depending on the location, type and orientachanged to the ON/RUN position.
tion of the obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
ParkSense姞 Warning Display
The ParkSense威 Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Programmable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense威 Warning Display is located in the Instrument cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
3
ParkSense威 Warning Display
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞 Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
Park Assist System OFF
Park Assist System ON
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
3
Slow Tone
Fast Tone
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
Arcs
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
None
Radio Mute
No
None
WARNING ALERTS
79-39 in
39-25 in
(200-100 cm)
(100-65 cm)
Single 1/2
Slow
Second Tone
3 Solid
3 Slow
(Continuous)
Flashing
Yes
Yes
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Fast
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Continuous
2 Slow
Flashing
Yes
1 Slow
Flashing
Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威 will MUTE the radio, if on, when the Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
system is sounding an audio tone.
information.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
When the ParkSense switch is pressed to disParkSense威 can be enabled and disabled with the
able the system, the instrument cluster will
ParkSense威 switch or through the Customerdisplay the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” mesProgrammable Features section of the EVIC. The availsage for approximately five seconds. Refer to
able choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or Sound and Display.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
3
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense
will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure
The ParkSense威 switch LED will be ON when the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/
ParkSense威 is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威 bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the message
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
Service The ParkSense姞 Rear Park Assist System
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
When the ParkSense威 Rear Park Assist System is malEVIC, see an authorized dealer.
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the Cleaning The ParkSense姞 System
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE Clean the ParkSense威 sensors with water, car wash soap
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damYour Instrument Panel” for further information. When age the sensors.
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
ParkSense姞 System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• ParkSense威, when on, will MUTE the radio when it is
sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense威 sensors regularly, taking care not
to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be
covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
properly. The ParkSense威 system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the
• When you turn ParkSense威 off, the instrument cluster
fascia/bumper.
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense威 off, it remains off • Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
key.
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
position and ParkSense威 is turned off, the EVIC will
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as
the EVIC .
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威 system operating properly.
3
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense威 is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威 in order to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when using
ParkSense威.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the Rear Park Assist system. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for safety and
must continue to pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before using the Rear Park Assist system, it is
strongly recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
Failure to do so can result in injury or damage to
vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear fascia
when the loudspeaker sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
PARKVIEW姞 REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威 Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The ParkView威 camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle above the rear License
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
3
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/ distances for each zone:
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威 Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威 to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威 should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威 camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
3
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
the “enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft-key.
Turning ParkView姞 On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
Overhead Console
Front Map/Reading Lights
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
Opener (HomeLink威), power liftgate and power sunroof can be turned on by pressing the switch on either side of
the console. These buttons are backlit for night time
switches may also be included, if equipped.
visibility.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights can be turned on by pressing the top
corner of the lens. To turn the lights off, press the lens a
second time.
3
Front Map/Reading Lights
To turn the lights off, press the switch a second time. The
lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE is
pressed.
Courtesy Lights
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunglasses Bin Door
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compartment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
Sunglasses Bin Door
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
3
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
NOTE:
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage • Erasing all channels should only be performed when
before you begin programming.
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase
channels when programming additional buttons.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that • If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
system.
Programming A Rolling Code
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN For programming garage door openers that were manuposition and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威 factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
indicator flashes.
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmitter button.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. The HomeLink威 indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN- Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door follow these steps:
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
not release the button.
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
activates, programming is complete.
steps.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to Programming A Non-Rolling Code
complete the training.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons, before 1995.
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
erase the channels.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink威 To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- follow these steps:
mitter button.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indicator light. HomeLink威 indicator will flash slowly and 2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the frenot release the button.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from 3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programslow to rapid.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
remaining steps.
3
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
successfully
accepted the frequency signal. The indiseveral seconds of transmission.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigfully trained.
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威 4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
door may open and close while you are programming.
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling 5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programdoor or gate motor.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in view.
erase the channels.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for Using HomeLink姞
programming, plug it back in at this time.
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
follow these steps:
etc.,). The handheld transmitter of the device may also be
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
used at any time.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until Security
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
not release the button.
in your vehicle.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
follow all remaining steps.
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
3
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the universal transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people, pets or other
objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener that has
a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal
safety standards. This includes most garage door
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use
a garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
General Information
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following visors on the overhead console.
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Venting Sunroof — Express
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
3
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Wind Buffeting
Ignition OFF Operation
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)
Sunroof Maintenance
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45
seconds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
Sunroof Fully Closed
the glass panel.
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
• To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp) power
outlets that can be used to power cellular phones, small • Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
electronics and other low powered electrical accessories.
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
The power outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system will
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is powered.
need to be replaced.
Power outlets labeled with a “key” are powered when
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only.
the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position, while
Do not insert any other object in the power outlets as
the outlets labeled with a “battery” are connected directly
this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Imto the battery and powered at all times.
proper use of the power outlet can cause damage not
NOTE:
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
• All accessories connected to the “battery” powered
outlets should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use to protect the battery against
discharge.
3
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The front power outlet is located inside the storage area In addition to the front power outlet, there is also a power
on the center stack of the instrument panel.
outlet located in the storage area of the center console.
Front Power Outlet
Front Center Console Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
If your vehicle is equipped with a rear full center console, The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right rear
there is also a power outlet located in the lower storage cargo area.
area of the rear full center console.
3
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Rear Full Center Console Outlet
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The rear cargo power outlet can be switched to
“battery” powered all the time by switching the power
outlet right rear quarter panel fuse in the fuse panel.
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Front Console
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Console Bin
Power Outlet Right Rear Quarter Panel Fuse
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet located on the
back of the center console to convert DC current to AC
current. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
NOTE: When the power inverter switch is pressed, there
will be a delay of approximately one second before the
inverter status indicator turns ON. The status indicator of
the AC power inverter indicates whether the inverter is
producing AC power.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
3
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
Front Seat Cupholders
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders — If Equipped
There are two cupholders for the front seat passengers There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
located in the fold-down center armrest.
located in the center console.
Front Cupholder Location
Rear Center Arm Rest Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
The rear full console cupholders are equipped with a
light ring that illuminates the cupholders for the rear
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers
passengers. The light ring is controlled by the Dimmer
located in the front of the rear full console.
Control. Refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Full Console Cupholders — If Equipped
3
Rear Full Console Cupholders
Light Ring In Rear Full Console Cupholders
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Mini Console Cupholders — If Equipped
STORAGE
There are two cupholders for the rear seat passengers Glove Compartment
located in the front of the rear mini console.
The glove compartment is located on the right side of the
instrument panel.
Rear Mini Console Cupholders
Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
To open the glove compartment, pull outward on the Front Center Console
latch and lower the glove box door.
The front center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
Door Storage
Large storage areas are built into the door panels for easy
access.
3
Storage Compartment
Door Panel Storage
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
the small latch located on the lid.
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment Latches
Lower Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Rear Full Center Console (If Equipped)
The rear full center console contains both an upper and a
lower storage area.
3
Upper Storage Compartment
Lift upward on the larger of the latches to access the
lower storage compartment.
Storage Compartment
To open the upper storage compartment, pull upward on
the small latch located on the front of the lid.
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Lower storage compartment light is always on The upper storage compartment may also be lifted forwith ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ward. Push in the release button located on the back of
the lid.
CAUTION!
Remove any items stored in the console cupholders
or devices with cords routing through upper storage
area. Damage may occur to upper console lid and
device cables when upper storage compartment is
lifted forward.
Lower Storage Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
3
Storage Compartment Rear Push Button
When lifted forward there is access to the lower storage
compartment.
Lower Storage Compartment
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: When the lower storage compartment is accessed Open storage areas, or cubby bins with removable liners,
it allows the armrest to flip forward for “fold flat mode”. are located rearward of the cupholders and in the lower
Fold flat mode allows the console armrest to be lowered front of the console.
below fold flat seat plane and protect the armrest vinyl
from damage when using the vehicle to haul cargo.
Console Cubby Bins
Rear Mini Center Console (If Equipped)
Fold Flat Mode
An open storage area, or cubby bin with removable liner,
is located in the front of the console.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium batteries
that recharge when snapped back into place.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
3
Console Cubby Bin
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Rechargeable Flashlight
The rechargeable flashlight is mounted on the left side of
the cargo area. The flashlight snaps out of the bezel when
needed. The flashlight features two bright LED light
Press And Release
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, Cargo Storage
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
There is a removable storage bin located on the left side
of the rear cargo area.
Additional storage can be found in the load floor. To
access the lower storage, lift the handle and raise the
storage lid.
Retractable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped
NOTE: The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting or
protect passengers from loose cargo.
To cover the cargo area:
Three-Press Switch
1. Grasp the cover at the center handle. Pull it over the
cargo area.
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the slots in
the pillar trim cover.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in
place.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area floor,
should be used to safely secure loads when the vehicle is
moving.
WARNING!
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or accident,
a hook could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
(Continued)
3
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
• Do not carry loads which exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left door or
left door center pillar.
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
accident.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the left side of the steering column.
The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
the first detent for intermittent operation and to OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position.
the second detent for continuous rear wiper operation.
Rotating the center portion upward once more
will activate the washer pump which will continue to operate as long as the switch is held. Upon
release of the switch, the wipers will resume the continuous rear wiper operation. When this rotary control is in
the OFF position, rotating it downward will activate the
rear washer pump which will continue to operate as long
as the switch is held. Once the switch is released it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will cycle
several times before returning to the parked position.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control panel. Press this button to turn
on the rear window defroster and the heated outside
mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will
illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
NOTE: As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Once the
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
switch is released the pump will resume normal operation.
3
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and side rails are designed to carry weight
on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The load must
not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be uniformly
distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
The crossbars on your vehicle are delivered stowed
within the roof rack side rails. Crossbars should always
be used whenever cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
Deploying the Crossbars
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends of the crossbar.
3
1 — Side Rail
2 — Crossbar
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying
Thumb Screw
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
NOTE: The thumb screws cannot be fully removed.
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Remove the crossbar from the stowed position by sliding
the crossbar towards the center of the roof. Repeat with
crossbar on the opposite side.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Starting with one crossbar, bend down the pivot supports
at each end.
Removing Crossbars
Bending Pivot
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
Position the crossbars across the roof making sure the Slide the cross bar into to the deploy position by moving
letters on the crossbars align with the matching letters on it towards the matching letter in the side rail. Be sure the
the side rail.
crossbar is fully deployed with the crossbar pushed as far
into the slot as possible. Once the crossbar is in place,
tighten both thumb screws completely.
3
Positioning Crossbars
Installing Crossbars
300 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Deploy and tighten the second crossbar to complete the Stowing the Crossbars
deployment of the crossbars.
Starting with one crossbar, completely loosen the thumb
screws at both ends. Slide the crossbar away from the
matching letter to remove it from the deployed position.
Repeat with the other crossbar.
CAUTION!
Be careful when handling the crossbars to prevent
damage to the vehicle.
Deployed Crossbars
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 301
Starting with the one crossbar, bend up the pivot sup- Then, position the crossbar along the correct side rail.
ports at each end.
Make sure the letters on the crossbar align with the
matching letters on the side rail.
3
Crossbar Pivot
Stowing Crossbars
302 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slide the crossbar outward, away from the center of the
roof. The crossbar will nest fully within the side rail.
Tightening Crossbar
Crossbar To Side Rail
Once the driver’s side crossbar is in place, tighten the
thumb screws completely.
Repeat the procedure to stow the second crossbar on the
opposite side.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 303
• If any metallic object is placed over the satellite radio
antenna (if equipped), you may experience interruption of satellite radio reception.
CAUTION!
Stowed Crossbars
NOTE:
• To help control wind noise, stow the crossbars in the
side rails when they are not in use.
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without the
crossbars deployed. The load should be secured
and placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on
the roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the
roof, place a blanket or other protective layer
between the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do
not exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of
150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as
evenly as possible and secure the load appropriately.
(Continued)
3
304 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Load should always be secured to cross bars first,
with tie down loops used as additional securing
points if needed. Tie loops are intended as supplementary tie down points only. Do not use ratcheting mechanisms with the tie loops. Check the
straps and thumbwheels frequently to be sure that
the load remains securely attached.
• Long loads that extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .309
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System . . . . . . . .335
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .311
▫ Vehicle Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
▫ Trip Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ EVIC White Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ EVIC Amber Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ EVIC Red Telltale Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features) . .339
▫ Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Messages # . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Turn Menu OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Compass / Temperature Display . . . . . . . . . .340
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . .362
▫ System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
䡵 UCONNECT威 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/
NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Operating Instructions
(Voice Command System) — If Equipped. . . . .354
▫ Operating Instructions
(Uconnect威 Phone) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .354
䡵 UCONNECT威 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .354
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
䡵 Uconnect威 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO. . . . . .363
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . . . .363
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for
CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . . .374
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .374
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect威 Phone) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
▫ Uconnect威 Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . .380
▫ Play Video Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1 . . . . . . . . . . . .393
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .395
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio . . .396
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .383
▫ Remote Control Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Locking The Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
䡵 UCONNECT威 MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If
Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Replacing The Remote Control Batteries. . . . . .402
▫ Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386
▫ Single Video Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
▫ Headphones Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Replacing The Headphone Batteries. . . . . . . . .404
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Unwired威 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
▫ System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .422
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .422
▫ Rear Climate Control — If Equipped . . . . . . .430
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Summer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Winter Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Vacation Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Operating Tips Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
4
1
2
3
4
5
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
— Glove Compartment
— Climate Controls
6 — Lower Switch Bank
7 — Hazard Switch
8 — Storage Bin
9 — ESC Off Switch
10 — Ignition Switch
11 — Headlight Switch
12 — Hood Release
13 — Fuel Door Release
14 — Dimmer Control
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
4
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
CAUTION!
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is The TPMS has been optimized for the original
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for warning have been established for the tire size
approximately one minute and then remain continuously equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operailluminated. This sequence will continue upon subse- tion or sensor damage may result when using requent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. placement equipment that is not of the same size,
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys- type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the 3. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD II that
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
monitors engine and automatic transmission conto continue to function properly.
trol systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON/RUN position before engine start. If the bulb
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
does not come on when turning the key from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
WARNING!
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
4. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
system. If this light remains on after several ignition 5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles Light — If Equipped
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Conyour authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
trol (ESC) is off.
problem diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
6. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop is not functioning and that service is required. However,
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
caused the ESC activation.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have for a defective outside light bulb.
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
10. High Beam Indicator
7. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light indicates that the headlights are on high
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steerlights are on.
ing wheel to switch the headlights to low beam.
8. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
11. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Red
Telltale Area
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable red telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)”.
9. Turn Signal Indicator
12. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The arrows will flash with the exterior turn sig- Display/Odometer Display
nals when the turn signal lever is operated. A tone
will chime, and an EVIC message will appear if either The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require
turn signal is left on for more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or
serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If
s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is
accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
14. 4 LOW — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display shows
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) mes15. Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
sages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center”.
13. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) White
Telltale Area
This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable white
telltales. For further information, refer to “Electronic
vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
4WD Lock switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
position (Off-Road Mode).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
16. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
17. Fuel Door Reminder
The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the
vehicle where the fuel door is located.
on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
20. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Malfunction
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
18. Fuel Gauge
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
Your Vehicle.”
the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position.
21. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
19. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on when a ACC has been
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
SET. For further information, refer to “Adapas a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
25. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Amber
Telltale Area
This light will turn on when a ACC is ON. For
further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise This area will display the EVIC reconfigurable amber
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea- caution telltales. For further information, refer to “Electures Of Your Vehicle.”
tronic vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
23. Electronic Speed Control Light SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
24. Electronic Speed Control ON
26. Vehicle Security Light
This light will flash rapidly for approximately
15 seconds when the vehicle theft alarm is
arming. The light will flash at a slower speed
continuously after the alarm is set. The security
light will also come on for about three seconds when the
ignition is first turned on.
This light will turn on when the electronic
27. Brake Warning Light
speed control is ON. For further information,
This light monitors various brake functions,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that the brake The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condiIf the light remains on when the parking brake has been tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the the brake fluid level checked.
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neceshydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
sary.
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
WARNING!
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS 28. TOW/HAUL
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The TOW HAUL button is located on the center
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
stack upper switch bank. This light will illumiturning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
nate when TOW HAUL mode is selected
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off 29. Seat Belt Reminder Light
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
When the ignition switch is first turned to the
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
ON/RUN position, this light will turn on for four
inspected by an authorized dealer.
to eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check,
if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
sound.
After
the bulb check or when driving, if the driver
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posior
front
passenger
seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
tion.
Belt Indicator Light will flash or remain on continuously.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application. Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
30. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
instrument cluster.
• Customer-Programmable Features (System Setup)
• Compass Display
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
The system allows the driver to select information by • UP Button
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
Press and release the UP button to scroll upwheel:
ward through the main menus (Fuel Economy,
ACC (if equipped), Vehicle Speed, Trip Info,
Vehicle Info, Tire PSI, Messages, Units, System
Setup, Turn Menu Off) and sub-menus.
• DOWN Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and
sub-menus.
• SELECT Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu. Hold the select
button to use the RESET function. For example,
while in the Fuel Economy page, hold and release the
select button to reset the AVG.
4
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• BACK Button
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warning or information messages. These pop up messages fall
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
into several categories:
previous menu or sub-menu.
• Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
The EVIC display consists of three sections:
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
1. The top line where compass direction, odometer line condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages”main menu item. As long
and outside temperature are displayed.
as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in
2. The main display area where the menus and pop up the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
messages are displayed.
message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”
3. The reconfigurable telltales section below the odom- and “Low Tire Pressure”.
eter line.
• Unstored Messages
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
The main display area will normally display the main This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle). white telltales area on the right, amber telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
• Unstored Messages Until RUN
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
the following messages:
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are • Vehicle Not in Park
“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake
• Key Left Vehicle
Pedal and Push Button to Start”.
• Key Not Detected
• Five Second Unstored Messages
• Press Brake Pedal and Push Button to Start
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five • Premium TPM System Graphic Display
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Ex• Service TPM System (refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoramples of this message type are “Memory System Uning System” in “Starting And Operating”)
available - Not in Park” and “Automatic High Beams
On”.
• Service Keyless System (refer to Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
Passive Entry - if equipped)
• Service Park Assist System
4
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Park Assist System Blinded
• Blind spot detection unavailable sensor blocked
• Keyfob Battery Low
• Normal Cruise Ready — When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system is turned off and Normal (Fixed
Speed) Cruise Control mode is available. Refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Left front turn signal lamp out
• Right front turn signal lamp out
• Left rear turn signal lamp out
• Right rear turn signal lamp out
• Service air filter
• Low Tire Pressure
• Perform service
• ESC System Off
• Service blind spot system
• Blind spot detection unavailable
• Blind spot system off
• Adaptive Cruise Off — When the Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) system is turned off. Refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Ready — When the ACC system is activated.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• ACC Set — After setting the desired speed in the ACC
system. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
• ACC Cancelled — To disable the ACC system. Refer to • Brake — If the ACC system predicts that its maximum
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
braking level is not sufficient to maintain the set
distance, this message will flash and a chime will
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
sound while ACC continues to apply its maximum
• Sensed Vehicle Indicator — The system detects a
braking capacity. When this occurs, you should immeslower moving vehicle in the same lane. Refer to
diately apply the brakes as needed to maintain a safe
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
distance from the vehicle ahead. Refer to “Adaptive
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Fea• Driver Override — If you apply the accelerator after
tures Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
setting the desired speed in the ACC system. Refer to
• Clean Radar Sensor in the Front of Vehicle — If the
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
ACC system deactivates due to performance limiting
The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
conditions. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if
• Distance Set — After changing the desired following
equipped).
distance in the ACC system, this message will display
momentarily. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Vehicle System Error — If the
(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeACC system turns off due to a temporary malfunction
hicle” (if equipped).
4
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
that limits functionality. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise • Ignition or Accessory On
Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
• Ignition or Accessory On Lights On
Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Oil temp high Speed may be limited
• ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Radar Sensor — If the
ACC system turns off due to an internal system fault • Oil temp high Speed limited
that requires service from an authorized dealer. Refer
• Turn signal on
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” (if equipped).
• Park assist on
• Cruise Off When Park Brake is On
• Warning object detected
• ACC Cancelled Below Min. Speed
• Remote start aborted — Door ajar
• Coolant low
• Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
• Oil change due > Dealer Info
• Remote start aborted — L/Gate ajar
• Key in ignition
• Remote start aborted — Fuel low
• Lights on
• Remote start disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
• Key in Ignition Lights On
• Remote start active — Push Start Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
• Remote start active — Insert Key and Turn to Run
• Service All Wheel Drive System
• Memory 1 profile set
• All Wheel Drive System in neutral
• Memory 2 profile set
• ECO — Fuel Saver Indicator
• Memory system unavailable — Not in Park
• To Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual
• Memory system unavailable — Seatbelt buckled
• Memory 1 profile recall
• Memory 2 profile recall
• Wrong Key
• Damaged Key
• Key not programmed
• Park Assist Disabled
• Automatic high beams on
• Automatic high beams off
• AWD AUTO
• LOW RANGE
• SERV AWD
• For AWD Low Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low
• For AWD High Slow Below 5 MPH or 8 KPH Put Trans
in N Press 4 Low
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC White Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Shift Lever Status
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
The shift lever status “P, R, N, D, L, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1” are
displayed indicating the shift lever position. Telltales “5, • Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON
4, 3, 2, 1” indicate the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
This light will turn on when the ACC is ON.
feature has been engaged and the gear selected is disFor further information, refer to “Adaptive
played. For further information on ERS, refer to “Starting
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
And Operating”.
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Electronic Speed Control ON
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) SET
This light will turn on when the ACC is SET.
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle. After five minutes, the system
This light warns the driver of a potential colliwill cool and return to normal operation. Refer to “Power
sion with the vehicle in front and prompts the
Steering” in “Starting and Operating” for further
driver to take action in order to avoid the
information.
collision. For further information, refer to
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding NOTE:
The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer opera• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
Equipped
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER
and during parking maneuvers.
TEMP” message and a icon are displayed on
the EVIC screen, it indicates that extreme steer- • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
ing maneuvers may have occurred, which
service.
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
4
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EVIC Amber Telltale Lights
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This light will turn on to indicate the windshield washer fluid is low.
• Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal • SERV AWD
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until The SERV AWD light monitors the electric shift AWD
fuel is added.
system. If the SERV AWD light stays on or comes on
during driving, it means that the AWD system is not
• Loose Gascap Indicator
functioning properly and that service is required.
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly EVIC Red Telltale Lights
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten telltales include:
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the • Door Ajar
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
• Liftgate Ajar
• Charging System Light
This light will turn on to indicate that liftgate
may be ajar.
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authostarted. If the light turns on while driving, stop the rized dealer.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
on.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool.
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vevehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
required. You may experience reduced performance, an Do In Emergencies” for more information.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may • Transmission Temperature Warning Light
require towing.
This light indicates that there is excessive trans• Engine Temperature Warning Light
mission fluid temperature that might occur
This light warns of an overheated engine condiwith severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. Further operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H, light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the Engine Oil Change Indicator System
light goes off.
Oil Change Due
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position if
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, press and release the MENU button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Fuel Economy
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
following Fuel Economy Functions displays in the EVIC:
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times • Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode
within 10 seconds.
• Distance To Empty
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Average Fuel Economy/Fuel Saver Mode — If
Equipped
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (Do This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. To reset the average fuel economy display,
not start the engine.)
press and release the SELECT button once while average
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times fuel economy is highlighted. Once reset, the history
within 10 seconds.
information will be erased, and the averaging will con3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position. tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you The FUEL SAVER MODE message will display above the
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not average fuel economy in the EVIC display. This message
will appear whenever the Multi-Displacement System
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
(MDS) (if equipped) allows the engine to operate on four Distance To Empty (DTE)
cylinders, or if you are driving in a fuel efficient manner. Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the SELECT
button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a “LOW FUEL” message. This display will continue
until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a significant
Fuel Saver Mode — On
amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving FUEL” message and a new DTE value will display.
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
4
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to cycle through all the
Trip Computer functions. The Trip Functions mode disThis feature allows you to monitor your vehicle speed on
plays the following information:
the EVIC display, press and release the SELECT button to
change the units of measure between in MPH or km/h. Trip A
Vehicle Speed
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
This feature allows you to track the total distance trav- reset.
eled since the last reset and the elapsed time of travel. Trip B
Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
reset.
• Trip A
Elapsed Time
• Trip B
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
Trip Info
• Elapsed Time
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
To Reset The Display
• Oil Pressure
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
Displays the actual oil pressure.
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
• Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Displays the actual oil temperature.
• Trans Temperature
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
• Engine Hours
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
be changed between English and Metric units of measure. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button the selected setting will be displayed.
4
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and release the UP and DOWN buttons if there is more
than one message to step through the remaining stored
When the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed to
messages. Pressing the BACK button takes you back to
change ignition switch positions, the Keyless Enter-Nthe Main Menu.
Go™ icon momentarily appears in the lower right corner
of the EVIC display showing the new ignition switch Turn Menu OFF
position.
Select from Main Menu using the DOWN button. PressRefer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting And Oper- ing the SELECT button blanks the menu display. Pressing
ating” for more information.
any one of the four steering wheel buttons brings the
menu back.
NOTE: Under certain conditions, the display may be
superseded by another display of higher priority. But Compass / Temperature Display
when the ignition switch position is changed, the display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
always re-appears.
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
Messages #
readings and the outside temperature.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Display — If Equipped
Select from Main Menu using the UP or DOWN buttons.
This feature shows the number of stored warning messages (in the # place holder). Pressing the SELECT button
will allow you to see what the stored messages are. Press
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
4
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
then press the SELECT button.
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the
SELECT button. The last variance zone number displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
NOTE: For the most accurate compass performance, the 5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
compass variance must be set before performing the
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
manual compass calibration. The variance should be set
function normally.
for the zone where the vehicle is driven, per the zone
map. For further information, refer to “Compass VariCustomer-Programmable Features (System
ance.”
Setup)
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the Setup when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached, out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is followed in 3
then press the SELECT button.
seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until Setup
displayed in the EVIC.
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
following choices.
the EVIC.
4
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
When in this display you may select one of five landeactivated.
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press Auto Unlock Doors
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Nederopened. To make your selection, press and release the
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will disSELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
play in the selected language.
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
Nav–Turn By Turn
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
When this feature is selected, the navigation system deactivated.
Select Language
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive Remote Unlock Sequence
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destinaWhen Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected, you can use your RKE
transmitter to recall one of two pre-programmed memory
profiles. Each memory profile contains desired position
settings for the driver seat, side mirror, adjustable pedals
(if equipped), power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped), and a set of desired radio station presets.
When OFF is selected, only the MEMORY switch on the
driver’s door trim panel will recall memory profiles. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button a check-mark appears next to the feature showing
the system has been activated or the check-mark is
removed showing the system has been deactivated. Refer
to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with passive entry and
the EVIC is programmed to Unlock All Doors 1st Press,
all doors will unlock no matter which passive entry
equipped door handle is grasped. If Driver Door 1st Press
is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when
the driver’s door is grasped. With passive entry, if Driver
Door 1st Press is programmed touching the handle more
than once will only result in the driver’s door opening.
You have to touch a passenger passive entry equipped Remote Start Comfort Sys.
door handle to unlock all doors passively when Driver’s
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
Door Only is programmed in the EVIC.
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
4
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
seat features will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
These features will stay on through the duration of
remote start or until the key is turned to RUN. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the “Flash
Lamps with Lock” feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a checkmark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers (Available with Automatic
Headlamps Only)
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
Easy Entry/Exit Seat (Available with Memory Seat
Only)
This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to
enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the
vehicle. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
4
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
Tilt Mirror In Reverse
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
When this feature is selected, the outside rearview mirselection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
rors will tilt downward when the ignition switch is in the
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
that the setting has been selected.
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press and release the Illuminated Approach
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
feature showing the system has been activated or the and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
check-mark is removed showing the system has been are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
deactivated.
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry)
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
that the setting has been selected.
door(s) without having to press the RKE transmitter lock
or unlock buttons. To make your selection, press and
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
When this feature is selected, the HSA system is active.
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
And Operating” for system function and operating inforbeen deactivated. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ” in
mation. To make your selection, press and release the
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the Gauge Glow Rings
check-mark is removed showing the system has been The gauge glow rings that illuminate the tachometer and
deactivated.
speedometer in the instrument cluster can be turned on
or off. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
The “ECO” message is located in the Compass/
feature showing the system has been activated or the
Temperature display; this message can be turned on or
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
off. To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
deactivated.
button until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that the setting has been selected.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
4
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto High Beams (Available With SmartBeam™
Only)
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Intermittent Wiper — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the
system reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
Blind Spot Alert
There are three selections when operating Blind Spot
Alert. By pressing and releasing the SELECT button once,
the Blind Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Blind
Spot: Lights Only” mode. When this mode is selected the
Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and will
only show a visual alert in the outside mirrors. By
pressing and releasing the SELECT button a second time
“Blind Spot: Lights/CHM” mode is activated. In this
mode the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors as well as an audible alert
when the turn signal is on. When “Blind Spot: Off” is
selected the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
Forward Collision Warning
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) feature can be can
be set to Far, set to Near or turned Off. The default status
of FCW is the Far setting. This means the system will
warn you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you when you are farther away. This gives you the
most reaction time. To change the setting for more
dynamic driving select the Near setting. This warns you
of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you
when you are much closer. This allows for a more
dynamic driving experience. To change FCW status press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
For further information, refer to ”Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
4
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The Calibrate Compass
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper- Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
ating information.
Compass Variance
Display Units Of Measure In:
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect威 gps (if equipped)
can be changed between English and Metric units of System Status
measure. To make your selection, press and release the Press and release the UP/DOWN buttons until one of the
SELECT button until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears. following System Status messages displays in the EVIC:
Liftgate Chime
• System OK
When this feature is selected the chime will sound when
• System Warnings Displayed (will display all currently
the liftgate is in operation, signaling that the liftgate is in
active System Warnings)
operation. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the • Tire Pressure Monitor System (shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For additional information,
feature showing the system has been activated or the
refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor System” in “Starting
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
And Operating”.
deactivated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
NOTE:
• Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pressures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
• Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
Tire Pressure Display
4
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
UCONNECT姞 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
UCONNECT姞 130
Refer to your Uconnect威 730N, 430 or 430N user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect姞 Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further details.
Uconnect威 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second TIME Button
time to turn off the radio.
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Clock Setting Procedure
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
SEEK Buttons
will begin to blink.
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch 4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conto seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
trol knob to save time change.
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
4
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
RW/FF
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons mid-range tones.
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
AM or FM frequencies.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
TUNE Control
treble tones.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
AM/FM Button
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
pressing the pushbutton twice.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
4
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
NOTE:
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
to operate the radio.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
RW/FF
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
button works in a similar manner.
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
4
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file norPress the right SEEK button to move to the next ranmally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
domly selected track.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
• Maximum number of files: 255
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file • Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
recording media and formats are limited. When writing
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
Supported Media (Disc Types)
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With 200
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this display.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
4
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
supported.
before writing to the disc.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
time to start playing the MP3 files.
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
vehicle speakers.
by the following:
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the Uconnect姞 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
Uconnect威 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
time to turn off the radio.
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Electronic Volume Control
Voice Command Button Uconnect威 Phone — If
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360 Equipped
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
volume, and to the left decreases it.
details.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
set at the same volume level as last played.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
SEEK Buttons
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch TIME Button
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
and radio frequency.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
INFO Button
SCROLL control knob.
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
will begin to blink.
RW/FF
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
trol knob to save time change.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. AM or FM frequencies.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button. TUNE Control
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure, to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
4
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Program Type
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
4
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL conBy pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
trol knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
save time change.
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
AM/FM Button
mode.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding • This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
button number will display.
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
Buttons 1 - 6
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
stations).
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
DISC/AUX Button
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
RW/FF
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restricworks in a similar manner.
tions.
4
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rates.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Playback of MP3 Files
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
by the following:
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
CD-R media
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will The folder list will time out after five seconds.
increase with more files and folders
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
time⬙ priority mode.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which ignition is OFF).
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s Operating Instructions (Uconnect姞 Phone) — If
audio system to amplify the source and play through the Equipped
vehicle speakers.
Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further details.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil- Uconnect姞 Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
4
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music, Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil- Number (ESN/SID)
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios. Please have the following information available when
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has calling:
limited coverage in Alaska.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Selecting Uconnect威 Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio • Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
mode.
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 Multimedia
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause (Satellite) Mode
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly ACC position to operate the radio.
on or above the antenna.
SEEK Buttons
Satellite Antenna
Reception Quality
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
4
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another RW/FF
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
without stopping until you release it.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for TUNE Control (Rotary)
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
button a second time.
MUSIC TYPE Button
INFO Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informamode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availor turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
seconds will allow the program format type to be seadditional three seconds will make the radio display the
lected.
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
to normal display).
type.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET butchannel with the same selected Music Type name.
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
stored into pushbutton memory.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
SETUP Button
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
following items:
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/ pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
Sirius subscription.
button number will display.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Buttons 1 - 6
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
4
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
or glove compartment.
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect威 radio User’s Manual for iPod威 or external
USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
iPodt or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when closing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely discharged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
etc.) information on the radio display.
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device can be controlled using the radio
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
pressing radio switches, as described below.
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device)
4
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
holding the FF>> button.
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
USB device and display data:
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
• Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
• While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see • RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 de- audio device.
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of • TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
each track in the current list and then forward to the
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
device or external USB device.
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
4
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Preset 4 – Genres
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
second line.
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
•
To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
delay in updating the information on the radio
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
display may be noticeable.
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom • LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counterthe TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
clockwise) to get to the track faster.
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
external USB device.
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
• Preset 1 – Playlists
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 2 – Artists
• Preset 3 – Albums
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect威 phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
4
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect威
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect威 phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Previous Track
Selecting Different Audio Device
Browse
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say current song that is playing will display info.
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
UCONNECT姞 MULTIMEDIA — VIDEO
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect威 ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — If
phone system to list audio devices.
Equipped
Next Track
Getting Started
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the • Screen located in the overhead console: Unfold the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button in the
music on your cellular phone.
center of the overhead console behind the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
• When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
into the VES™ player, the screen turns on automatically, the headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
• The Remote Control
• The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Overhead Video Screen
Play A DVD
• With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position, 1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
Control knob.
Or
Press the LOAD button then corresponding number (1–6)
where the DVD is to be loaded (Non-Touch-Screen).
4
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
• Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list appears on the right side of
the screen, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the
Rear VES Controls screen.
4
Rear VES Soft-Key
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the
MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key
at the top left of the screen.
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The “1” and “2” soft-keys are displayed for the NOTE:
headphone channels. Touch 1 or 2 based on which
• To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
channel you want to change, select the new mode from
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
the available list on the right. Modes that are unavailable
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
are greyed-out.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
DISC In The MEDIA Column
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Play Video Games
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
3. Right Audio In – Red
4
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press
ENTER on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
Rear VES Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then touch AUX 1 in the VES Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
column. To exit press the back arrow soft-key at the Video Is Playing On Channel 1
top of the screen.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
AUX 1 In The VES Column
4
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/ Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
the desired audio source or repeatedly press the
MODE button on the remote until the desired audio 2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
source appears on the screen.
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
Rear VES Soft-Key
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
• VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
simultaneously.
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
• In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and right side equates to Channel 2.
• If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
Channel 2 is for audio only. Selecting a video source
(DVD) will not show the video on the screen.
• When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
will display on the screen and the audio could be
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
• Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the Video Screen is closed.
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD In The Media
Column
4
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the
disc is recognized and displays the menu screen or
starts playing the first track.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passengers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
NOTE:
• Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
on the left side of the screen.
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER. • Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in
the MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow at
the top left of the screen.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
NOTE:
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen. • To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
• Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmission. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
Rear VES Soft-key
• Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control functions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play, Pause,
FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper corner
will turn off the remote control screen functions.
4
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls And Indicators
Remote Control
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power
button to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel
button is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after
five seconds.
Remote Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which chan- 7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select a satellite audio or video channel from
nel is being controlled by the remote control. When the
the Station list, or select playback modes (SCAN/
selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the remote
RANDOM for a CD).
controls the functionality of screen Channel 1 (right side
of the screen). When the selector switch is in the
8. 䉴 / 㥋 (Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
Channel 2, position the remote controls the functional9. ▪ (Stop) – Stops disc play.
ity of screen Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable 10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
satellite video mode, press to advance to the next
the radio. When listening to compressed audio on a
data disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and
channel. In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
PROG Down selects the previous directory. When
6. 䉲 / Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
listening to a disc in a radio with a multiple-disc
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to
changer, PROG Up selects the next disc and PROG
the start of the current or previous audio track or
Down selects the previous disc.
video chapter. In satellite video mode, press to advance to the previous channel. In menu modes, use to 11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
navigate in the menu.
4
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press 17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
rewind through the current audio track or video
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
chapter. In satellite video mode, press to advance to
the previous channel. In menu modes use to navigate
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
in the menu.
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this
manual for details on changing modes.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
19. 䉱 / NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
settings section) or the DVD Setup menu. When a
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
disc is loaded in the DVD player (if equipped) and
next audio track or video chapter. In satellite video
the VES™ mode is selected and the disc is stopped,
mode, press to advance to the next channel. In menu
press the SETUP button to access the DVD Setup
modes, use to navigate in the menu.
menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a
DVDs disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s
contents.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compartment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
4
The Remote Control Storage
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
• To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, press the Video Lock button on the DVD
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
player (if equipped). If the vehicle is not equipped Headphones Operation
with a DVD player, follow the radio’s instructions to The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
turn Video Lock on. The radio and the video screen(s) using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
indicate when Video Lock is active.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
• Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
operation of the VES™.
do so for themselves.
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op- verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
eration. To replace the batteries:
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
• Locate the battery compartment on the back of the channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
• Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
• Replace the battery compartment cover.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1.
2.
3.
4.
Volume Control
Power Button
Channel Selection Switch
Power Indicator
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone
selector switch.
NOTE:
• When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned to
the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
4
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is Replacing The Headphone Batteries
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned to Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
operation. To replace the batteries:
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
• Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
downward.
as a DVD Video), pressing DISPLAY shows the status
on a popup banner at the bottom of the screen. • Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
Pressing the MODE button will advance to the next
according to the polarity diagram shown.
mode. When the mode is in an audio only source (such
as FM), the Mode Selection menu appears on screen. • Replace the battery compartment cover.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate to the available modes and press the ENTER
button to select the new mode.
Unwired姞 Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙ or ⬙your⬙) of this
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wireless headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transferBACK button on the remote control.
able.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
How Long Does the Coverage Last? This warranty lasts may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
as long as you own the Product.
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Will Unwired威 Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威 redoes not cover any damage or defect that results from
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replaceEXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARTECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULTWARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DEFOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, If you have any questions or comments regarding your
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU- Unwired威 wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR 3332 or email [email protected]
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
4
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
You may register your Unwired威 wireless headphones mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
1-888-293-3332.
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM, and SAT).
System Information
The VES™ has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM),
SEEK, SCAN, TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as
Shared Modes
The VES™ and radio are capable of communicating with long as it is not in shared mode.
each other. This allows the VES™ to output radio audio
to the headphones and the radio to output VES™ audio
to the vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ are in
the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be visible on
the radio’s display and the shared icon will be visible on
the VES™ screen. When in shared mode, the same audio
source is heard in the headphones and vehicle speakers
simultaneously.
When in shared disc or satellite video mode both the
radio and the VES™ have control of the video functions.
The VES™ has the ability to control the following video
modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes 1. Channel 1 Mode
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
2. Channel 1 Shared Status
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode. 3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
Information Mode Display
4. Channel 2 Mode
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action
9. Clock
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Information Mode Video Screen Display
4
408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Numeric Keypad Menu
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired
digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲,
䉴, 䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote control’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these
steps until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Numeric Keypad Menu
Station List Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409
navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to find the desired station,
press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
Disc Menu
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random
play.
4
Disc Menu For CDs
410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Display Settings
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circumstances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱, 䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴, 䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
button.
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
Video Screen Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc player.
in Play mode, Aux Video, SIRIUS Backseat TV™, etc.), Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appearscreen closed:
ance of the video on the screen. The factory default
• Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411
• Close the video screen.
Disc Formats
• To change the current audio mode, press the remote The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the followcontrol’s MODE button. This will automatically select ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
the next available audio mode without using the Mode • DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
Select menu.
notes about DVD Region Codes)
• When the screen is reopened, the video screen will • DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
• Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify • CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the • Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
4
412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD Region Codes
Recorded Discs
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or recorded) are not supported.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guidelines when recording discs.
• Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413
• For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD- The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so (CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
each track number is unique.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
• For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
DVD player.
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
supported.
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
• The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99 Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
• Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play • The DVD player always uses the file extension to
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙ or ⬙.MP3⬙ and WMA
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙ or
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
recording software publisher for more information about
these extensions for any other types of files.
burning playable discs.
• For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
4
414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Any file that is copy protected (such as those down- • To change the current directory, use the remote conloaded from many online music stores) will not play.
trol’s PROG Up and Down buttons.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
Disc Errors
begin playing the next available file.
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
• Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
player will automatically skip the file and begin playincompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
ing the next available file.
⬙Disc Error⬙ message.
• If you are creating your own files, the recommended
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
supported. For both formats, the recommended
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
• To change the current file, use the remote control’s or first track.
DVD player’s 䉱 button to advance to the next file, or
the 䉲 button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot Display
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera- Other Language Setup
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙ and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.
4
DVD Player Language Menu
416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙ setting • When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the language code is
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Engnot valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙夡⬙. If the
lish. These languages are selected using a special fourdigits are visible after this step, then the language code
digit code.
is valid.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
Menu and follow these additional instructions:
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor butvehicle was purchased.
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
Language
Code
Language
Code
• Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙ setting, then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
• Using the remote control Up and Down cursor buttons, select a digit for the current position. After
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
Dutch
German
Portuguese
2311
1304
2519
French
Italian
Spanish
1517
1819
1418
Rating and Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to
control the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most
DVD-Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417
them where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and higher numbers are designated for more adult
audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passenger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
4
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
DVD Password Entry
418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
follow these additional instructions:
• Using the remote control Left and Right cursor buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
• Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
DVD Player Level Menu
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and • Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
follow these additional instructions:
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
• Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
Product Agreement
buttons, select the Rating tab.
• Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intelleccontrol’s ENTER button.
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
• Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set intended for home or other limited viewing uses otherthe value for the current digit, and then press the wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next disassembly is prohibited.
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
Dolby威 Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
digits.
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙, ⬙MLP
• After the four-digit password is entered, press the Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right
reserved.
4
420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
Remote Sound System Controls
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch CD Player
between the various modes available (AM/FM/CD/ Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
control is different depending on which mode you are in. after the current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
each mode.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
Radio Operation
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch center button will select the next available CD in the
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
player.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbutton.
4
422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particuTo keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
precautions:
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the good disc before considering disc player service.
surface.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
wiping from center to edge.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch- your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
ing the disc.
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners, not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
or anti-static sprays.
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect威 (if equipped).
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and passenger.
Dual-Zone Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
— If Equipped
• The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
4
• When occupants in the vehicle select the AUTO mode
operation, a comfort temperature can be set by using
the temperature up and down buttons, and the auto
blower operation will be set automatically.
• The system provides set-and-forget operation for optimum comfort and convenience.
• The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. A/C Button
5. Blower Control Display
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning This display shows the current Blower speed selection.
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. 6. Right Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
Performing this function will cause the ATC to switch
This display shows the temperature setting for the right
into manual mode.
front seat occupant.
2. Recirculation Control Button
7. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
indicator illuminates when ON. Performing this function
3. Left Front Seat Occupant Temperature Display
will cause the ATC to switch into manual mode. The
This display shows the temperature setting for the left blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected.
front seat occupant.
4. Mode Display
8. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
This display shows the current Mode selection (Panel, Provides the passenger with independent temperature
Bi-Level, Floor, Mix).
control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425
9. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature Press and release to turn the Climate Control OFF.
control. Push the button for cooler temperature settings. 13. Mode Control Button
10. Auto Temperature Control Button
Press and release to select between Modes (Panel, BiControls airflow temperature, distribution, volume, and Level, Floor, Mix). Performing this function will cause the
the amount of air recirculation automatically. Press and ATC to switch into manual mode.
release to select. Refer to “Automatic Operation” for 14. SYNC Button
more information. Performing this function will cause
the ATC to switch between manual mode and automatic Press and release to control the temperature setting for
both zones from the driver temperature control.
modes.
11. Blower Control
15. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
There are seven blower speeds, the blower speed in- Provides the driver with independent temperature concreases as you move the control to the right from the trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
lowest blower setting. Performing this function will 16. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
cause the ATC to switch into manual mode.
Provides the driver with independent temperature control. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
4
426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experiProvides the rear seat occupants with independent
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
blower and temperature control. Push the button to
system to function automatically.
activate the rear climate control and allow the rear seat
occupants control of the rear blower and temperature NOTE:
settings.
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
Automatic Operation
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
1. Press the AUTO button on the Automatic Temperature
comfort as quickly as possible.
Control (ATC) Panel.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
passenger temperature control buttons. Once the deCenter (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
sired temperature is displayed, the system will
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
achieve and automatically maintain that comfort level.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups, the blower fan will remain
17. Rear Control Button
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will the control clockwise and decreases when you move the
control counter-clockwise.
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control outer dial. The fan will now
This system offers a full complement of manual override
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
features.
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually, Auto mode.
temperature control will continue to operate automatiThe operator can also select the direction of the airflow
cally.
by selecting one of the following positions.
Blower Control
Panel Mode
Manual Operation
There are seven fixed blower speeds.
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
Use the outer dial control to regulate
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
the amount of air forced through the adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
system in any mode you select. The
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
blower speed increases as you move down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
4
428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side winNOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi–Level
dow defrosting. When the defrost mode is selected, the
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
blower will automatically default to medium-high unless
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
the blower is controlled manually.
Floor Mode
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
of air is directed through the defrost and side ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
window demister outlets.
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429
Air Conditioning (A/C)
Recirculation Control
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
system. When in A/C mode and the ATC is set to a cool
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
temperature, dehumidified air flows through the air
pressing the Recirculation control button. Reoutlets. If Economy mode is desired, press the A/C
button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC display and circulation mode should only be used temporarily. The
deactivate the A/C system. Also, make sure to select only recirculation LED will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
Recirculation mode LED and allow outside air into the
NOTE:
vehicle.
• If the system is in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
can be turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
mode is not allowed in the Defrost modes to improve
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, window clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled automatically if Defrost is selected.
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
4
430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rear Climate Control — If Equipped
The Rear Climate Control system has floor air outlets,
and overhead outlets at each outboard rear seating
position. The unit provides warm or cool air through the
floor and upper outlets.
The rear blower and temperature controls for the rear
seat passengers are located in the headliner, near the
center of the vehicle.
If the rear system is off, changing the rear setting to a
position other than off will turn the rear system on. If
both the front and rear systems are off, the rear system
Rear Manual Climate Controls
will not turn on. The rear system will not operate with
1 – Rear Blower
3 – Rear Temperature
the front system off.
2 – Rear Climate Control Icon
Rear Blower Control
The primary control for the rear blower is on the front
climate control unit, located on the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431
Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the Rear Temperature Control
second row seat occupants have control of the rear Only when the Rear Control Icon is illuminated do the
blower speed.
second row seat occupants have control of the rear
The rear blower control, located in the rear overhead temperature control knob.
console, has an off position and a range of blower speeds. To change the temperature in the rear of the vehicle,
This allows the second row seat occupants to control the rotate the temperature control knob counterclockwise for
volume of air circulated in the rear of the vehicle.
cold air, and clockwise for heated air.
CAUTION!
Interior air enters the Rear Manual Climate Control
system through an intake grille, located in the right
side trim panel behind the third row seats. The
heater outlets are located in the right side trim panel,
just behind the sliding door. Do not block or place
objects directly in front of the inlet grille or heater
outlets. The electrical system could overload, causing
damage to the blower motor.
Rear Mode Control
Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each
of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets
to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the
floor outlets.
4
432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level blower speeds will reduce fogging. Interior fogging on
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the head- the windshield can be quickly removed by selecting the
Defrost mode.
liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Operating Tips
Window Fogging
Windows will fog on the inside when the humidity inside
the vehicle is high. This often occurs in mild or cool
temperatures when it’s rainy or humid. In most cases,
turning the air conditioning (pressing the A/C button) on
will clear the fog. Adjust the temperature control, air
direction, and blower speed to maintain comfort.
Regular cleaning of the inside of the windows with a
non-filming cleaning solution (vinegar and water works
very well) will help prevent contaminates (cigarette
smoke, perfumes, etc.) from sticking to the windows.
Contaminates increase the rate of window fogging.
Summer Operation
NOTE: In some cases during high temperature trailer
tow operation the Air Conditioning system performance
may be reduced. This is to help protect the engine from
overheating during the high load condition.
Your air conditioning system is also equipped with an
As the temperature gets colder, it may be necessary to automatic recirculation system. When the system senses
direct air onto the windshield. Adjust the temperature a heavy load or high heat conditions, it may use partial
control and blower speed to maintain comfort. Higher Recirculation A/C mode to provide additional comfort.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433
Winter Operation
Vacation Storage
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow, or other obstructions.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
4
434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips Chart
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .447
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .449
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Five-Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.6L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .446
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
(3.6L Engine) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case (ThreePosition Switch) (5.7L Engine) – If Equipped . .469
▫ Shifting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ When To Use LOW Range – If Equipped . . . . .476
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Traction Downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
䡵 FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY (IF EQUIPPED) —
5.7L ENGINE ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .486
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .486
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .489
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .490
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .512
▫ Ready Alert Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ Rain Brake Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .512
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped. .513
䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .502
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .514
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .515
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .515
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .509
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .534
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .535
䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .520
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .521
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .522
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .537
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525 䡵 FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .532
▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539
▫ 3.6L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
▫ 5.7L Engine – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . .540
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555
▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .561
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542 䡵 SNOW PLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .545 䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .563
▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
▫ Recreational Towing – Rear-Wheel Drive
䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
(Single-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .554
▫ Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ FOBIK is in the passenger
compartment.
5
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Installing And Removing The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
Installing The Button
1. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
NOTE: The ENGINE START/STOP button should only
be removed or inserted with the ignition in the OFF
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
2. Insert the ENGINE START/STOP button into the
ignition switch with the lettering facing up and read- 1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
able.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
3. Press firmly on the center of the button to secure it into
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
position.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
Removing The Button
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
1. The ENGINE START/STOP button can be removed
from the ignition switch for key fob use.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, press the button again.
2. Insert the metal part of the emergency key under the
chrome bezel at the 6 o’clock position and gently pry NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
the button loose.
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
OFF position.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions – With Driver’s
3. If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/ Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle Or NEUTRAL Position)
speed must be below 5 mph (8 km/h) before the The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in and START. To change the ignition switch positions
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF without starting the vehicle and use the accessories
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the follow these steps.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
EVIC (if equipped) will display a “Vehicle Not In • Starting with the ignition switch in the OFF position:
Park” message and the engine will remain running. • Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
change the ignition switch to the ACC position (EVIC
could roll.
displays “IGNITION MODE ACCESSORY”),
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
5
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time If Engine Fails To Start
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position
WARNING!
(EVIC displays “IGNITION MODE RUN”),
• Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
return the ignition switch to the OFF position (EVIC
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
displays “IGNITION MODE OFF”).
serious personal injury.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transTo ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availcould enter the catalytic converter and once the
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button)
Clearing A Flooded Engine
(Using Fob With Integrated Key)
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather⬙ proce- “Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel:
1. Press and hold the brake pedal.
1. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
2. Press the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages.
3. Press and release the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
The starter motor will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal,
The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10
turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to
seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is located:
• 3.6L Engine – coiled and strapped to the engine oil
dipstick tube.
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will • 5.7L Engine – bundled and fastened to the injector
harness.
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
(Continued)
5
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the shift lever is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out
of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
pedal must be pressed.
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Five-Speed Automatic Transmission (3.6L Engine)
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
— If Equipped
moving the shift lever between these gears.
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
5
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will select
the highest available transmission gear, and will display
that gear in the instrument cluster as 3, 2, 1.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restarting.
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaurestarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
LOCK/OFF position first.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedal
released), after you have placed it in PARK. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
5
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
DRIVE
Transmission Limp Home Mode
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
driven to an authorized dealer for service without damwhen operating the vehicle under heavy loading condiaging the transmission.
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 shift In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
control (refer to “AutoStick威” in this section) to select a can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower gear following steps:
will improve performance and extend transmission life
1. Stop the vehicle.
by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
5
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
operation.
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom- shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your lever to the left (-) will downshift the transmission,
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has activate ERS mode, display the current gear in the
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the shift lever
to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top available
dealer service is required.
gears.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Overdrive Operation
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1
1
2
1-2
3
1-3
4
1-4
D
1-5
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following conditions are present:
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (5.7L Engine)
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum — If Equipped
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
5
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)
Operation” in this section). Moving the shift lever to the
left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will select
the highest available transmission gear, and will display
that gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle the
ignition to the LOCK/OFF position before restarting.
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Transmission gear engagement may be delayed after move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaurestarting the engine if the key is not cycled to the tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
LOCK/OFF position first.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever rearward (with the brake pedal
released), after you have placed it in PARK. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before leaving
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position, the shift
lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN position. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON/RUN position, and also press the
brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever
could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
5
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first and second gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and
fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
range will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger
To access all six available gears, you must use the of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning
Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Elec- Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate
tronic Range Select (ERS) Operation” in this section).
differently until the transmission cools down.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range
Select (ERS) Operation” in this section) to select a lower
gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
5
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is seexcess heat generation.
lected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
be modified depending on engine and transmission
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature imdriven to an authorized dealer for service without damproves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
aging the transmission.
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section). following steps:
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
1. Stop the vehicle.
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the 2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
3. Turn the engine OFF.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
5. Restart the engine.
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal additional underdrive gear which is not normally used
during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear
operation.
can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recomwhen towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode,
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears ) are the same as the
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
normal fourth and fifth gears.
recur. If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
dealer service is required.
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift lever to the left (-) will activate ERS mode, display the
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift current gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into the shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) will change the top
second and first gears normally.
available gear.
5
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
The instrument cluster display will show the requested
top gear limit, however the transmission will not downshift to the requested gear if doing so would overspeed
the engine. The transmission will downshift once the
vehicle speed has slowed sufficiently.
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-). The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to The automatic transmission includes an electronically
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The translever position indicator in the instrument cluster.
mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the
following conditions are present:
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
• the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate
temperature,
• the engine coolant
temperature,
has
reached
an
adequate
• vehicle speed is sufficiently high,
• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator, and
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting occurs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the transmission will automatically downshift (for engine braking) during steady braking maneuvers.
5
TOW/HAUL Switch
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. Normal operation is always
the default at engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate
that the transmission is able to shift into and out of
Overdrive.
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati- • If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
first few seconds of operation after shifting the transdifferent feeling or response during normal operation in
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque conNOTE:
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
engine.
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are ALL-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Single-Speed Operating Instructions/Precautions
Because top gear is disabled, and engine speed is (3.6L Engine) – If Equipped
higher when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting This system contains a single-speed (HI range only)
properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Elec- transfer case, which provides convenient full-time alltronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the wheel drive. No driver interaction is required. The Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Traction Control (BTC) System, which combines standard
ABS and Traction Control, provides resistance to any
wheel that is slipping to allow additional torque transfer
to wheels with traction.
NOTE: This system is not appropriate for conditions
where LOW range is recommended. Refer to “Off-Road
Driving Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
5
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Three-Position Switch) (5.7L Engine) – If
Equipped
AWD Control Switch (Three-Position)
This is an electronic shift transfer case and it is operated
This electronically shifted transfer case provides three
by the AWD Control Switch, which is located on the
mode positions:
center console.
• All-wheel drive automatic range (AWD AUTO)
• All-wheel drive low range (LOW RANGE)
• Neutral (NEUTRAL)
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be Transfer Case Position Indicator Messages
driven in the AWD AUTO position for normal street and The Transfer Case Position Indicator messages (AWD
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads.
AUTO and LOW RANGE) are located in the EVIC
For variable driving conditions, the AWD AUTO mode (Electronic Vehicle Information Center) and indicate the
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but current and desired transfer case selection. Refer to
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. All-wheel “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Undrive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When you select a different transfer case position,
senses a loss of traction.
the position indicator lights will do the following:
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
LOW RANGE position can be used to lock the front and If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished
by rotating the AWD Control Switch to the desired 2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for specific shifttransfer case completes the shift.
ing instructions. The LOW RANGE position is designed
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
LOW RANGE position on dry hard surfaced roads may
cause increased tire wear and damage to the driveline
components.
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift requirements, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙ for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
means that the all-wheel drive system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SERV AWD Warning Light”
is illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
When operating your vehicle in LOW RANGE, the
engine speed is approximately three times that of the
The “SERV AWD” Warning Light” monitors the elecAWD AUTO position at a given road speed. Take care not
tronic shift all-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
(40 km/h).
5
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Proper operation of all-wheel drive vehicles depends on For additional information on the appropriate use of each
tires of equal size, type and circumference on each wheel. transfer case mode position, see the information below:
Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
AWD AUTO
transfer case.
All-Wheel Drive Auto Range – This range sends power to
Because all-wheel drive provides improved traction,
the rear wheels. The all-wheel drive system will be
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
LOW Range
All-Wheel Drive Low Range – This range provides low
speed all-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
N
Neutral – This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met. To
retry a shift: return the control knob back to the original
position, make certain all shift requirements have been
met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
AWD AUTO TO LOW RANGE
NOTE: When shifting into or out of LOW RANGE some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
5
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift or
3. While still rolling, rotate the AWD control switch to
if they no longer are being met while the shift attempt is
the desired position.
in process, the desired position indicator light will flash
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not continuously while the original position indicator light is
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
ON, until all requirements have been met.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
With the ignition switch in the ON position and the ON position, then the shift will not take place and no
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL Shift Procedure
Rotate the AWD control switch to the desired position.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, engine off.
After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
2. Vehicle stopped, with foot on brake.
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
3. Place the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Alternate Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
4. Hold down the NEUTRAL “pin” switch (with a pen,
etc.) for four seconds until the LED light by the switch
starts to blink indicating shift in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the NEUTRAL
shift is complete.
NOTE: If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
Tow Vehicle Safely, Read Neutral Shift Procedure in
Owners Manual” message will flash from the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
Neutral Switch
5. Repeat Steps 1 to 4 to shift out of NEUTRAL.
5
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use LOW Range – If Equipped
WARNING!
Do not drive in 4WD-LOW Range on dry pavement;
driveline damage may result. 4WD-LOW Range
locks front and rear drivelines together and does not
allow for differential action between the front to rear
driveshafts. Driving in 4WD-LOW on pavement will
cause driveline binding and ⴖcrow-hopⴖ; use only on
wet or slippery surfaces.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
When off-road driving, shift to LOW for additional water, there are a number of precautions that must be
traction. This range should be limited to extreme situa- considered before entering the water.
tions such as deep snow, mud, or sand where additional
low speed pulling power is needed. Vehicle speeds in
excess of 25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
LOW range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h). Always check water depth before entering,
as a precaution, and check all fluids afterward. Driving through water may cause damage that may not be
covered by the new vehicle limited warranty.
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. If you must
drive through water, try to determine the depth and the
bottom condition (and location of any obstacles) prior to
entering. Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water
to minimize wave effects.
and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you must cross
flowing water avoid depths in excess of 9 in (23 cm). The
flowing water can erode the streambed, causing your
vehicle to sink into deeper water. Determine exit point(s)
that are downstream of your entry point to allow for
drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than 20 in (51
cm), and reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
effects. Maximum speed in 20 in (51 cm) of water is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your vehicle
fluids and lubricants (engine oil, transmission oil, axle,
transfer case) to assure the fluids have not been contamiFlowing Water
nated. Contaminated fluid (milky, foamy in appearance)
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm should be flushed/changed as soon as possible to prerun-off), avoid crossing until the water level recedes vent component damage.
5
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for additional
control at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a low
gear and shift the transfer case to LOW if necessary. Refer
to “All-Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operating” for further information. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain forward motion. Over-revving
the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads, because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of
control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE: Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission to a
lower gear and shift the transfer case to LOW. Use first
gear and LOW for very steep hills.
If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop
and immediately apply the brakes. Restart the engine,
and shift into REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill,
allowing the compression braking of the engine to help
regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to control
vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid locking or
skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
never attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE gear. Never
back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only the brake.
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill always After Driving Off-Road
drive straight up or down.
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest of a does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain forward motion always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
by turning the front wheels slowly. This may provide a can get any problems taken care of right away and have
fresh “bite” into the surface and will usually provide your vehicle ready when you need it.
traction to complete the climb.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Traction Downhill
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the transfer
case into LOW range. Let the vehicle go slowly down the • Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
hill with all four wheels turning against engine compression drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle • Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
speed and direction.
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
When descending mountains or hills, repeated braking
values specified in the Service Manual.
can cause brake fade with loss of braking control. Avoid
repeated heavy braking by downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
5
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
propeller shafts.
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake POWER STEERING
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
3.6L Engine
and cleaned as soon as possible.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electro-hydraulic power
WARNING!
steering system that will give you good vehicle response
and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces.
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
The system will vary its assist to provide light efforts
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
while parking and good feel while driving. If the electronot have full braking power when you need it to
hydraulic power steering system experiences a fault that
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
prevents it from providing power steering assist, then the
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
system will provide mechanical steering capability.
and cleaned as necessary.
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the electrically driven pump to reduce or stop power steering
assistance in order to prevent damage to the system.
Normal operation will resume once the system is
allowed to cool.
occurred, which caused an over temperature condition in
the power steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over temperature condition no longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe,
then pull over and let vehicle idle for a few moments
until the light turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING SYSTEM” NOTE:
message and a flashing icon are displayed on • Even if power steering assistance is no longer operathe EVIC screen, it indicates that the vehicle
tional, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assistance. Refer
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
to “Electronic Vehicle Information (EVIC)” in “Underand during parking maneuvers.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” messervice.
sage and an icon are displayed on the EVIC screen, it
indicates that extreme steering maneuvers may have
5
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
5.7L Engine
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer- Power Steering Fluid Check
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY (IF EQUIPPED) —
5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
PARK position.
5
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
Parking Brake
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Never
leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a
vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the shift
lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/
RUN mode. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All five of these
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Also, your vehicle is equipped with Trailer Sway Control
(TSC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake Lock Differential
(BLD), Ready Alert Braking, and Rain Brake Support.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lock-up and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and Traction Control System (TCS)
Operating” for further information.
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
WARNING!
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the stability.
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), functions similar to a limited-slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one wheel
on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel. This
will allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. This feature remains active even if
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for further
information.
5
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
anti-lock brake system (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
5
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” located in the
instrument cluster will start to flash as soon as the tires
lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the
TCS is active. If the “ESC Malfunction Indicator Light”
begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss
of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESC equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESC system has two available operating modes in
AWD AUTO range and two-wheel drive vehicles, and
one operating mode in AWD LOW range.
AUTO Range (All-Wheel Drive Models) Or
Two-Wheel Drive Models
On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD
AUTO range and in two-wheel drive vehicles. Whenever
the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if equipped) is
shifted from AWD LOW range or NEUTRAL back to
AWD AUTO range, the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off”
mode for specific reasons as noted below.
5
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
OFF” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
portion of ESC, except for the BLD feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC OFF” switch. This
will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
ESC OFF Switch
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand, or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. Once the
situation requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Off” mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momen- Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
tarily pressing the “ESC OFF” switch. This may be done TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exceswhile the vehicle is in motion.
sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate
actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system may
WARNING!
reduce engine power and apply the brake of the approWhen in “Partial Off” mode, the enhanced vehicle priate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer. TSC
will become active automatically once an excessively
stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is required. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
AWD Low Range (LOW)
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
Partial Off
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in AWD LOW to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
range. Whenever the vehicle is started in AWD LOW further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
range, or the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
AWD AUTO range or NEUTRAL to AWD LOW range, engine power may be reduced and you may feel the
the ESC system will be in the “Partial Off” mode.
brakes being applied to individual wheels to attempt to
stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when the
ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
5
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 6% (approximate) grade or
greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
when the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur. This could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
• If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releasing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
(Continued)
5
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done
using the Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Ready Alert Braking
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time required to
reach full braking during emergency braking situations.
It anticipates when an emergency braking situation may
occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. When the throttle is released very quickly,
Ready Alert Braking applies a small amount of brake
pressure. This brake pressure will not be noticed by the
driver. The brake system uses this brake pressure to allow
a fast brake response if the driver applies the brakes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Rain Brake Support
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
Rain Brake Support may improve braking performance
in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water buildup
on the front brake rotors. It only functions when the
windshield wipers are in the LO or HI mode, it does not
function in the intermittent mode. When Rain Brake The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (loSupport is active, there is no notification to the driver and cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
no driver interaction is required.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
5
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” Tire Markings
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
NOTE:
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa- • Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempotion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Exdesign standards. Tires designed to this standard have
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
5
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Tire Placard Location
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
Tire and Loading Information Placard
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
5
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occuaxles must not be exceeded. For further information on
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of NOTE:
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
• The following table shows examples on how to calcu“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
• For the following example, the combined weight of
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
(392 kg).
capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
5
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
5
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well
as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
5
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
and cold tire inflation pressures.
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire inflation pressures.
your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
5
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
CAUTION!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire rotation pattern.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
5
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
first opportunity.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopWARNING!
ping when you are stuck.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
replaced.
Life Of Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
5
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
5
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only
• Due to limited clearance, the Security Chain Company
(SCC) Super Z6 low profile traction device or equivalent is recommended on P265/60R18 or 265/50R20
tires.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and then retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on On/Off-Road
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being perThe tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at formed.
different loads and perform different steering, handling,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at NOTE: The premium Tire Pressure Monitor System will
automatically locate the pressure values displayed in the
unequal rates.
correct vehicle position following a tire rotation.
5
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
The suggested rotation method is the “forward-cross” TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
shown in the following diagram.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold tire placard pressure.
Tire Rotation
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three-hour period. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Operating” for information on
how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is
normal and there should be no adjustment for this
increased pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning
threshold for any reason, including low temperature
effects, or natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above recommended
cold tire placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure
warning has been illuminated, the tire pressure must be
increased to the recommended cold tire pressure in order
for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to be
turned off. The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle has a recommended cold
(parked for more than three hours) tire placard pressure
of 33 psi (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 28
psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold tire pressure value.
5
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures have
been established for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.
Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage. Do
not use aftermarket tire sealants or balance beads if
your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS, as damage
to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire
failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
the tire.
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
Base System
tires. A low spare tire will not cause the “Tire Pressure
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate, a warning mestechnology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to sage to appear, or the chime to sound.
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
illuminate in the instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
readings to the Receiver Module.
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly cluster for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
check the tire pressure in all of your tires, and to maintain chime will be activated, when one or more of the four
the proper pressure.
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
The TPMS consists of the following components:
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
• Receiver Module
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will extinguish,
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
once the updated tire pressures have been received. The
5
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this information.
housings.
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. In addition, a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a minimum of
five seconds when a system fault is detected, and a chime
will sound. If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The
“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off
when the fault condition no longer exists. A system fault
can occur by any of the following:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
to be ON, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
TPM sensors.
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and a chime to sound. Driving the
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
that affects radio wave signals.
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
will turn OFF the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” as long as none of the road tires are below the
low pressure warning threshold.
• If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire, in place of a road tire, that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster for a minimum of
five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn ON. After driving the vehicle for
up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be
displayed for a minimum of five seconds. For each
subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, a
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed
for a minimum of five seconds, and the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. Once you repair or
replace the original road tire, and reinstall it on the
vehicle in place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim-mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire pressure
readings to the Receiver Module.
5
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is particularly important, for you to regularly Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
check the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an auThe Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) consists of the
dible chime will be activated, when one or more of the
following components:
four active road tire pressures are low. In addition, the
• Receiver Module
EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for
a minimum of five seconds, an ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
and a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
low tire(s) “flashing.” Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Inforwhich display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
mation Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your InstruCenter (EVIC), and a graphic displaying tire pressures
ment Panel” for further information.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units
A tire pressure monitoring sensor is located in the spare in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
wheel, if the vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly. The matching full-size
spare tire can be used in place of any of the four road
tires.
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
will automatically update, the graphic display of the
pressure value(s) will stop “flashing,” and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will extinguish once the
updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) to receive this information.
SERVICE TPM SYSTEM Warning
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible,
and inflate the low tire(s) that is “flashing” on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
displayed in the ⬙Inflate to XXX⬙ message. The system
The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s), indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
5
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Your system can be set to display pressure units message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
in PSI, kPa, or BAR.
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur by
any of the following:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same Radio Frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel
housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light” will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault is detected possibly related to an incorrect sensor
location fault. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
message is then followed by a graphic display, with
pressure values still shown. This indicates the pressure
values are still being received from the TPM Sensors but
they may not be located in the correct vehicle position.
However, the system still needs to be serviced as long as
•
the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message exists.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle is equipped with a matching full-size
spare wheel and tire assembly, it has a tire pressure
monitoring sensor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). In the event that
the matching full-size spare tire is swapped with a low
pressure road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
still show the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
to be ON, a chime to sound, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message to appear in the EVIC, and the graphic
display will still show the low tire pressure value
“flashing.” Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn OFF the “Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” as long as none of
road tires are below the low pressure warning threshold.
If your vehicle is not equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it does not
have a tire pressure monitoring sensor in the spare tire.
The TPMS will not be able to monitor the tire pressure.
If you install the spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, the “Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light” will remain ON, a chime
will sound, and the EVIC will still display a “flashing”
pressure value in the graphic display. After driving the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h),
the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
5
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will
sound, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, and the EVIC will display a ⬙SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM⬙ message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the spare tire, the
TPMS will update automatically.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followIn addition, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” ing licenses:
will turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC will display a
MRXC4W4MA4
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no United States
tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in Canada
2546A-C4W4MA4
any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
in order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufacturer recommends the use of 89 octane for optimum performance.
3.6L Engine – If Equipped
The use of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in
This engine is designed to meet all emis- these engines.
sions regulations and provide excellent
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
fuel economy and performance when usyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gasohigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
line having an octane rating of 87. The use
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experiprovide any benefit over regular gasoline in these
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
engines.
before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L Engine – If Equipped
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when using high-quality unleaded gasoline having
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
5
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates not be covered under warranty.
may be used in your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85 MMT In Gasoline
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms: MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
• operate in a lean mode
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
• poor engine performance
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
• poor cold start and cold drivability
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
E-85 perform the following:
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
• change the engine oil and oil filter
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and Califor• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the nia reformulated gasoline.
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
5
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Materials Added To Fuel
CAUTION! (Continued)
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
5
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
E-85 Fuel Cap
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
E-85 Badge
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 87, or E-85
fuel, or any mixture of these two fuels.
For best results, a refueling pattern that avoids alternatE-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and ing between E-85 and unleaded gasoline is recom15% unleaded gasoline.
mended.
5
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
• you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威 Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
• you drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
least 5 miles (8 km)
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formustarting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
during warm up.
in MOPAR威 engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer only
NOTE:
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With
the requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, you may experience
contains additional requirements, developed during exhard starting and rough idle following start up even if
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
the above recommendations are followed, especially
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威 or an
when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
Starting
Replacement Parts
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol compatible parts.
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
CAUTION!
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the locking fuel filler door,
on the driver’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is for use with this
vehicle.
1. Press the fuel filler door release switch (located under
the headlamp switch).
Fuel Filler Door Release Switch
2. Open the fuel filler door, and remove the fuel filler
cap.
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
CAUTION!
Fuel Filler Cap
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let impurities into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting
aftermarket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the MIL to turn
on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
5
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
• If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
Emergency Fuel Filler Door Release
If you are unable to open the fuel filler door, use the fuel
filler door emergency release.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Push down on the inboard edge of the left storage bin,
this will pop up the outboard edge.
3. Grab popped up outboard edge with other hand to
disengage snaps.
4. Remove the storage bin.
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
5. Pull the release cable.
will display in the EVIC telltale display area. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
SELECT button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
Release Cable
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
5
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
bottom of the label is your VIN.
components sometimes specified by purchasers for inGross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehiThe GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle cle’s GVWR.
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
Tire Size
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load Rim Size
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
Inflation Pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Curb Weight
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
added.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
5
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
In this section you will find safety tips and information
further information.
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
and safely as possible.
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temTo maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve- ready for operation⬙ condition.
hicles used for trailer towing.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
Common Towing Definitions
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
TRAILER TOWING
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
WARNING!
If the gross trailer weight is 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) or
more, it is mandatory to use a weight-distributing
hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If
you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Tongue Weight (TW)
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg) The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
allowance for the presence of a driver.
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles Frontal Area
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
5
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Sway Control
Weight-Distributing Hitch
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight to
the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When
used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle
and Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross
axle weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight-distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, and braking
performance, and could result in a collision.
• Weight-distributing hitch systems may not be compatible with Surge Brake Couplers. Consult with
your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable
Recreational Vehicle dealer for additional information.
5
Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch
(Incorrect)
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine
Model
3.6L
3.6L
5.7L
5.7L
RWD
AWD
RWD
AWD
GCWR (Gross Combined Wt. Rating)
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)
11,600 lbs (5 262 kg)
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg)
13,100 lbs (5 942 kg)
Refer to local laws
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m) 6,200
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200
60 sq ft (5.57 sq m) 7,200
for maximum trailer towing
NOTE:
• The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part
of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
lbs (2 812
lbs (2 812
lbs (3 266
lbs (3 266
speeds.
kg)
kg)
kg)
kg)
Max. Trailer
Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
620 lbs (281 kg)
620 lbs (281 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
720 lbs (327 kg)
information. The addition of passengers and cargo
may require reducing trailer tongue load and Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the
trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,900 lbs
(1 769 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
• Vehicles not factory equipped with trailer tow package
are limited to 3,500 lbs (350 lbs tongue weight).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions. Never exceed
the maximum tongue weight stamped on your trailer
hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading Information Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for the
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle driveproper maintenance intervals. When towing a trailer,
train components, the following guidelines are recomnever exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
mended.
Towing Requirements
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in
PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized .
5
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
brake controller is not required.
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the transBefore setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
mission fluid and filter(s) as specified for “police, taxi,
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.” Refer to the “Maintetraffic.
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
NOTE: Check the transmission fluid level before towing
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The (5.7L engine).
transmission controls include an adaptive drive strategy
to avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select • Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped), or a lower gear range
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
(using the Electronic Range Select [ERS] shift control).
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
NOTE: Using the TOW/HAUL mode (if equipped) or
you can get back to cruising speed.
selecting a lower gear range (using the ERS shift control)
while operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi- • Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
tions, will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
Towing Tips
5
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
Cooling System
SNOW PLOW
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over- Snow plows, winches, and other aftermarket equipment
heating, take the following actions:
should not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in the
City Driving
front end structure. The airbags could deploy unexpectWhen stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans- edly or could fail to deploy during a collision.
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
WARNING!
Do not add a snow plow, winches, or any other
aftermarket equipment to the front of your vehicle.
This could adversely affect the functioning of the
airbag system and you could be injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF the
Ground
NONE
Rear-Wheel
Drive Models
NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Front
On Trailer
Rear
ALL
NOT ALLOWED
OK
OK
All-Wheel Drive Models
•
•
•
•
See Instructions
Transmission in PARK
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
5
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for towing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational Towing – Rear-Wheel Drive Models
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
CAUTION!
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Single-Speed Transfer Case)
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models do
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the transmission
not have a NEUTRAL (N) position in the transfer case.
into PARK.
NOTE: This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or
4. Turn the engine OFF and remove the key fob from the
vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the
ignition switch.
ground.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or transfer
case damage. Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used. Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
recreational towing.
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
• The transmission must be in PARK for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL
(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
Recreational Towing – All-Wheel Drive Models
(Two-Speed Transfer Case)
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) and
the transmission must be in PARK for recreational towing. The NEUTRAL (N) selection button is adjacent to the
transfer case selector switch. Shifts into and out of
transfer case NEUTRAL (N) can take place with the
selector switch in any mode position.
(Continued)
5
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Failure to follow these procedures can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
5. Press and hold the brake pedal.
6. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop and shift the
transmission into PARK.
2. Turn the engine OFF.
3. For vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, remove the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ button and use the key fob to
complete this procedure. Refer to “Installing And
Removing The ENGINE START/STOP Button/
Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting and Operating”
for how to remove the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ button.
5
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for four
seconds. The light behind the N symbol will blink,
indicating shift in progress. The light will stop blinking
(stay on solid) when the shift to NEUTRAL (N) is
complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN NEUTRAL” message will display on the EVIC (Electronic
Vehicle Information Center). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
8. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL (N)
light stays on, release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
9. Start the engine.
10. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
11. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure 16. Release the parking brake.
that there is no vehicle movement.
17. Disconnect the negative battery cable, and secure it
12. Turn the engine OFF, then turn the ignition switch
away from the negative battery post.
back to the ON/RUN position without starting the
NOTE:
engine.
• Steps 1 through 6 are requirements that must be met
13. Firmly apply the parking brake.
before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
14. Shift the transmission into PARK.
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met before pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met
CAUTION!
during the shift, then the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
Damage to the transmission may occur if the transwill flash continuously until all requirements are met
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine • The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
is OFF before shifting the transmission into PARK.
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
15. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
tow bar.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light 8. Using the point of a ballpoint pen or similar object,
press and hold the recessed transfer case NEUTRAL
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
(N) button (located by the selector switch) for one
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)
second.
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Reconnect the negative battery cable.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
5. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
NEUTRAL (N) Switch
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
gear clash.
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
9. After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, 15.
release the NEUTRAL (N) button.
16.
10. After the NEUTRAL (N) button has been released,
17.
the transfer case will shift to the position indicated by
the selector switch.
18.
11. Shift the transmission into PARK.
12. Release the brake pedal.
13. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
14. Start the engine.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Shift the transmission into DRIVE, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ button (if equipped) may
now be reinstalled if desired. Refer to “Starting
Procedures/Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
5
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
• Steps 1 through 7 are requirements that must be met
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer • A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light
met during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light
indicates that shift requirements have not been met.
will flash continuously until all requirements are met
or until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.
NOTE:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .574 䡵 JUMP-STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .574
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .576
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .594
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 䡵 EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .596
▫ Spare Tire Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .598
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
▫ Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
▫ Rear-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600
▫ All-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601
6
574 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
switch bank just above the climate controls.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your an impending overheat condition:
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
other motorists.
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 575
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT
(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
6
576 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are located
in rear cargo area, below the load floor.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 577
6
Jack Storage Location
Thumb Screw Location
Rotate the plastic thumb screw on the end of the jack to Spare Tire Stowage
loosen the jack and remove from the bracket.
The spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or stow
the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench connected to
the square socket extension to rotate the “spare tire
drive” nut. The nut is located under a plastic cover at the
578 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
center-rear of the cargo floor area, just inside the liftgate
opening.
CAUTION!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact type tools can damage the winch mechanism.
Spare Tire Removal
1. Remove the jack tools from the bag.
2. Raise the rubber mat and remove the plug from
storage compartment floor.
Spare Tire Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 579
3. Fit the jack handle extension over the drive nut. Use 4. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and rotate it
the lug wrench handle and extension to completely
vertically behind the rear bumper.
lower the spare tire. Keep turning the handle until the
winch stops.
6
Spare Tire
Lowering/Raising Spare Tire
580 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Spread the retaining tabs on the plastic plate and pull
the metal stamping toward you to release it from the
plastic plate.
Sleeve And Cable
7. Pinch the three short and two long tubes to remove the
protective plate from the steel spare wheel.
Tab Location
6. Slide the metal stamping up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the metal stamping and push
it through the hole in the plastic plate and wheel.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 581
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Place the transmission in PARK, set the parking brake
and activate the Hazard Warning flashers.
3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.
Releasing Protective Plate
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, away from
traffic.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain
in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
6
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set the automatic
transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
2. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts by
turning them to the left, one turn, while the wheel is
still on the ground.
6
Jack And Tool Assembly
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body flange
just behind the front tire as indicated by the triangular
lift point symbol on the sill molding. Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Jack Location
Lift Point Symbol On Sill Molding
4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the rear
tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear tire (as
indicated by the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding). Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure
the jack is fully engaged.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
6
Lift Point On Sill Molding
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw clockwise.
Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire.
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Install the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle and install
the lug nuts with the cone-shaped end toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Mounting Spare Tire
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw counterclockwise, and remove the jack and wheel blocks.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct wheel
nut tightness is 110 ft lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt about
the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
10. Push out the small center cap using the jack tool from
“Beauty Side”
inside the aluminum road wheel and position the
wheel behind the rear bumper with the “beauty side” NOTE: The plastic plate will prevent the road wheel
from being scratched when sliding it under the vehicle.
facing rearward.
6
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
11. Insert the two long tubes on the plastic protective 12. Slide the road wheel on the ground using the protecplate in the lug holes of the road wheel. Push the end
tive plate until it is directly under the winch and
of the winch’s cable, spring, steel sleeve and stamped
between the rear bumper and exhaust system heat
cone shape wheel plate though the road wheel and
shields. Raise the tire by turn the lug wrench on the
protective plate.
winch extension clockwise until it clicks/ratchets
three times to make sure the cable is tight.
Installing Winch
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
NOTE: Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the 14. Reinstall the plastic plug into the floor of the cargo
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch cable
area. Roll up and store the Jack, Tool Kit and Tire
may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire loose.
Changing Instructions. Reinstall the cover for the jack
in the rear storage bin.
WARNING!
Do not use power tools to winch the tire up or down.
Impact-type tools may damage the winch mechanism.
13. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Return the
tools to the proper positions in the tool bag. Fold the
flap on the tool bag under the tools and roll the tools
in the bag underneath the others. Use the Velcro
straps to secure the tool bag to the jack with the lug
wrench on the forward side of the jack. Expand the
jack on the bracket by turning the thumb screw
clockwise until it is tight to prevent rattles.
15. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire repaired as
soon as possible and properly secure the spare tire,
jack and tool kit.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
6
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 110 ft-lbs (150 N·m). If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
handle counterclockwise.
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located under the passenger’s front seat. There are remote locations located under
the hood to assist in jump-starting.
Remote Battery Posts
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post (covered with protective cap)
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. Remove the protective cover over the remote positive
(+) battery post. Pull upward on the cover to remove
it.
4. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
6
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
remote negative (-) post of the discharged vehicle.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
from the remote positive (+) post of the discharged
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
vehicle.
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
10. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote posi- front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
tive (+) battery post of the discharged vehicle.
and REVERSE while gently pressing the accelerator. Use
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle the least amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will
you should have the battery and charging system in- maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
spected at your authorized dealer.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, causing serious injury.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there will be
one in the rear and two mounted on the front of the
vehicle. The rear hook will be located on the driver’s side
of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue a
vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Remove the rubber liner from the cupholder (located
next to the shifter on the center console).
4. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the
shift lever override access cover (located on the bottom of the cupholder).
6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
hole, and push and hold the override release lever vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles
down.
may also be towed as described under “Recreational
7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover and
cupholder liner.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
Towing
Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF
the Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Flatbed
RWD MODELS
AWD MODELS
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 15 miles (24 km) max distance
See instructions in “Recreational Towing” under “Starting and Operating”
• Transmission in PARK
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
OK
BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip- position, not the ACC position.
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If the vehicle’s key fob is unavailable or battery is Rear-Wheel Drive Models
discharged refer to “Shift Lever Override” in “What To The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting the all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
CAUTION!
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEUDo not use sling type equipment when towing. TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do not distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
Without The Key Fob
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 mi (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe engine or transmission damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the key fob is with
a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to
prevent damage to the vehicle.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,
or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on a
towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel
stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position)
with the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the
ground.
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for detailed
instructions.
Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer case have
no NEUTRAL position, and therefore must be towed will
all four wheels OFF the ground.
All-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicles with a two-speed transfer
case may be towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal
damage to the transmission damage or transfer case
will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .605
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .606
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .607
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .607
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .608
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .610
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
7
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Front/Rear Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632
▫ Front Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
▫ Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .653
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
▫ Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
▫ Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp . . . . . . . . . .655
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .655
▫ Totally Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . .643
▫ Rear License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND
GENUINE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657
▫ High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658
▫ Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .652
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1
2
3
4
5
— Totally Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
— Automatic Transmission Dipstick
— Engine Oil Fill
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
— Air Cleaner Filter
6
7
8
9
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Dipstick
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator)
Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
soon as possible.
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
7
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
do the following:
PROGRAMS
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
this test over.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
of a normal bulb check.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
running.
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off, or before starting the
engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the SAFE level range. Adding 1 U.S. Quart
(0.95L) of oil when the level is at the bottom of the SAFE
range will result in the level being at the top of the SAFE
range.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
7
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is Identification Symbol
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
This symbol means that the oil has
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informabeen certified by the American
tion.
Petroleum Institute (API). The
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intermanufacturer only recommends
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
API Certified engine oils.
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
operation of the Fuel Saver Technology. Refer to “Fuel
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
Saver Technology – If Equipped” in “Starting and Operstarting and vehicle fuel economy.
ating” for further information.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
Lubricants that do not have both, the engine oil certifiengine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
cation mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Comshould not be used.
partment” illustration in this section.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
Engine Oil Viscosity – 5.7L Engine
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating The manufacturer strongly recommends against the adtemperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiThe engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended tives.
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
tion.
Engine Oil Viscosity – 3.6L Engine
7
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the Engine Air Cleaner Filter
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
station or governmental agency for advice on how and maintenance intervals.
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
WARNING!
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
7
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
7
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position. amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate, Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri- windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
7
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces- 1 — Wiper Arm
sary.
2 — Pivot Cap
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
NOTE: The rear wiper arm cannot be raised fully up1. Lift the pivot cap on the rear wiper arm upward, this ward unless the pivot cap is raised first.
will allow the rear wiper blade to be raised off of the
2. Lift the rear wiper arm upward to raise the wiper
liftgate glass.
blade off of the liftgate glass.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
3. Grab the bottom of the wiper blade and rotate it 4. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the wiper blade
forward to unsnap the blade pivot pin from the wiper
holder at the end of the wiper arm, and firmly press
blade holder.
the wiper blade until it snaps into place.
5. Lower the wiper blade and snap the pivot cap into
place.
Adding Washer Fluid
On vehicles equipped with a Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), the low washer fluid level will be
indicated. When the sensor detects a low fluid level, the
windshield will light on the vehicle graphic outline and
the “WASHER FLUID LOW” message will be displayed.
7
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Wiper Blade
Blade Pivot Pin
Wiper Arm
Wiper Blade Holder
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. The fluid reservoir is
located in the engine compartment, be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in
cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating
information can be found on most washer fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at
the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the
entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
7
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
• We recommend using MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are
anticipated.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance • Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionintervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replace(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes
pressure to build up in the cooling system. To
prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces. Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the bottle should be between the ranges
indicated on the bottle.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing cool- • Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
ant. Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the
engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month.
7
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
expansion bottle must also be protected against
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
freezing.
emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at system components should be inspected periodically.
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your maintenance intervals.
engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check – Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service, or immediately if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a plastic reservoir. On the
outboard side of the reservoir, there is a “MAX” dot and
a “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be kept within these
two dots. Do not add fluid above the MAX mark, because
leakage may occur at the cap.
With disc brakes, the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Front Axle Fluid Level Check
The front axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill
hole.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m).
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage
them and cause them to leak.
Rear Axle Fluid Level Check
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten the plugs as it could damage then
and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
The rear axle oil level needs to be between 1/8 in (3 mm)
below the bottom of the fill hole and the bottom of the fill Transfer Case
hole.
Fluid Level Check
The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be tightened to For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
22 to 29 ft lbs (30 to 40 N·m) on axles with aluminum required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
housings. The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be the exterior surfaces of the transfer case assembly should
tightened to 22 to 52 ft lbs (30 to 70 N·m) on axles with be inspected. If oil leakage is suspected inspect the fluid
cast iron housings.
level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
7
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the hole, Selection Of Lubricant
when the vehicle is in a level position.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
Drain
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug. Recom- only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
mended tightening torque for drain and fill plugs is 15 to fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is
25 ft lbs (20 to 34 N·m).
important to maintain the transmission fluid at the
correct level using the recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You could
damage them and cause them to leak.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant should be
used.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and
filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for
fluid specifications.
Special Additives
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check – 3.6L Engine
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
any special additives in the transmission.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered transmission filler tube is capped and no dipstick is
product and its performance may be impaired by supple- provided. Your authorized dealer can check your transmental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi- mission fluid level using a special service dipstick.
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
7
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle Fluid Level Check – 5.7L Engine
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is
sion damage.
at normal operating temperature (approximately 180°F /
82°C). This occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of
CAUTION!
driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid can• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac- not be held comfortably between the fingertips.
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter shudder and will require more frequent
fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
• If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission
damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the
proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Use the following procedure to check the fluid level
properly:
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Run the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
3. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake
pedal.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear position (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in each position), ending with the shift lever in
PARK.
After adding any quantity of oil through the dipstick
tube, wait a minimum of two minutes for the oil to
fully drain into the transmission before rechecking the
fluid level.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
seated.
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
6. Remove the dipstick again, and note the fluid level on
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room temboth sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
The holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid if the
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
should be between the ⬙HOT⬙ (upper) reference holes
normal operating temperature.
on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the
fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube
to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use
ONLY the recommended fluid (see ⬙Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts⬙ for fluid specifications).
7
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
If the fluid temperature is below 50°F (10°C) it may
not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until
the temperature is elevated enough to produce an
accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to
warm the fluid.
7. Check for leaks. Release the parking brake.
NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the
transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make
sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is
normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from
its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains
engaged in the dipstick tube.
Fluid And Filter Changes
In addition, change the fluid and filter if the transmission
is disassembled for any reason.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
maintenance intervals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
and Tar Remover to remove.
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
The most common causes are:
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
What Causes Corrosion?
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
7
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
packaged and sealed.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and • Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
open.
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
Special Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of • To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner.
the owner.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean, or a
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
7
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
directly on the mirror.
cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
FUSES
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment. This center contains cartridge fuses
and mini fuses. A description of each fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover, otherwise the
7
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
cavity number of each fuse is stamped on the inside cover
that corresponds to the following chart.
Cavity
J01
J02
J03
J04
J05
Totally Integrated Power Module
J06
Cartridge
Fuse
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
25 Amp
Natural
25 Amp
Natural
40 Amp
Green
Mini
Fuse
Description
Air Suspension
Power Liftgate
Module
Trailer Tow
Driver Door Node
Passenger Door
Node
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
Cavity
J07
J08
J09
J10
J11
J12
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
Power Seat
J13
J14
J15
E-Brake
J17
Headlamp Wash
Relay Contact
Drive Train Control
Module
Rear Defroster
J18
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Blue
40 Amp
Green
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Blue
Mini
Fuse
Description
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD)
Trailer Tow
Lamps/Park Lamps
Front Cabin Fan/
Blower
Starter Motor Solenoid
Powertrain Control
Module/Powertrain
Control Module/
Transmission Range
7
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
J19
J20
J21
J22
M1
M2
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
Mini
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
20 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Natural
Description
Cavity
Radiator Fan Motor
HI/Radiator Fan
Motor Low
Front Wiper
M3
M5
M6
Front/Rear Washer
Control
Sunroof Module
M7
M8
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
Stop Lamps
M9
Electronic Limit
Slip Differential/
Air Suspension
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
20 Amp
Yellow
25 Amp
Natural
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Liftgate/Headrest
115V AC Power
Inverter
Cigar Lighter
Power Outlet #2
(Switchable)
Front Heated Seat
& Steering Wheel
Rear Heated Seats
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Cavity
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
M10
15 Amp
Blue
M11
10 Amp
Red
M12
30 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
Video/Universal
Garage Door
Opener
Heating, Ventilation
& Air Conditioning
(Climate Control
System)
Radio/Amplifier
M13
M14
Cartridge
Fuse
Instrument Cluster
Back Up Camera –
If Equipped
Mini
Fuse
Description
M15
20 Amp
Yellow
M16
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
Power Seat
Module(s)/
Adaptive Cruise
Control/Audio
Telematics/
Daytime Running
Lights Relay/Air
Suspension
Module/Instrument
Cluster
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Stop Lamp
M18
Cartridge
Fuse
7
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
M19
M20
M21
M22
M23
M24
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
25 Amp
Natural
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
25 Amp
Natural
Automatic Shutdown 1 and 2
Instrument Cluster
Automatic Shutdown 3
Horns (Low/High)
– Right
Horns (Low/High)
– Left
Rear Wiper
Mini
Fuse
Description
M25
20 Amp
Yellow
M26
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Fuel Pump Motor
Output/Diesel Lift
Pump (Export
Only)
Driver Door Switch
Bank
Ignition Switch/
Wireless Control
Module/Keyless
Entry Module
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission Controller
M27
M28
Cartridge
Fuse
15 Amp
Blue
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
Cavity
M29
M30
M31
M32
M33
Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
Cavity
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Tire Pressure Monitor – If Equipped
J1962 Diag Connector
Backup Lamps
Occupant Restraint
Controller
Powertrain
Controller/
Transmission Controller
Mini
Fuse
Description
M34
10 Amp
Red
M35
15 Amp
Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Park Assist
Module/Climate
Control System
Module/Infra Red
Sensor/Compass
Module
Left Rear
Parklamps
Power Outlet
M36
M37
M38
Cartridge
Fuse
25 Amp
Natural
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
System Module
All Door Lock
&Unlock
7
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the totally integrated power module cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do
so may allow water to get into the totally integrated
power module and possibly result in a electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to protect your battery.
You may:
• Remove fuse #J13 in the Totally Integrated Power
Module (TIPM) labeled Main Ignition-Off Draw (IOD).
• Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e. vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Exterior Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Glove Box Lamp
Grab Handle Lamp
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
Visor Vanity Lamp
Rear Cargo Lamp
Underpanel Courtesy
Lamps
Instrument Cluster (General Illumination)
Telltale/Hazard Lamp
Bulb Number
194
L002825W5W
VT4976
V26377
214–2
906
103
74
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamp (Low Beam)
Headlamp (High Beam)
Front Park/Turn Signal
Lamps
Front Fog Lamps
Front Side Marker Lamps
Rear Turn/Stop/Tail
Lamps
Rear Liftgate Tail Lamps
Rear Backup Lamps
Rear License Lamps
Center High-Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Bulb Number
Service at Authorized
Dealer
H11
9005
7444NA
PSX24W
W5W
3057
194
921 (W16W)
W5W
LED (Service at Authorized Dealer)
7
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps , when the headlamps are
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID) – If
turned on, there is a blue hue to the lamps. This diminEquipped
ishes and becomes more white after approximately 10
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube. seconds, as the system charges.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of Halogen Headlamps – If Equipped
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb 1. Open the hood.
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
2. Turn the low or high beam bulb one–quarter turn
an authorized dealer for service.
counterclockwise to remove from housing.
BULB REPLACEMENT
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps when the
headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
2. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latches and squeeze
them together to unlock the bulb from the back of the
front fog lamp housing.
Front Turn Signal
1. Open the hood.
2. Turn the turn signal bulb one–quarter turn counter3. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed opening in
clockwise to remove from housing.
the housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace the
bulb.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
Front Fog Lamps
1. Reach through the cutout in the splash shield and
disconnect the wiring harness from the fog lamp
connector.
• Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If
the bulb comes in contact with any oily surface,
clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
• Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the socket
or the lamp wiring.
7
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Align the index tabs of the front fog lamp bulb with
the slots in the collar of the bulb opening on the back
of the front fog lamp housing.
5. Insert the bulb into the housing until the index tabs are
engaged in the slots of the collar.
6. Firmly and evenly push the bulb straight into the lamp
housing until both tabs snap firmly into place and are
fully engaged.
7. Connect the wiring harness to the front fog lamp
connector.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup Lamps
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Remove the two push-pins from the tail lamp housing.
3. Grasp the tail lamp and pull firmly rearward to
disengage the lamp from the aperture panel.
4. Twist socket counter clockwise and remove from
lamp.
5. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
6. Replace the bulb, reinstall the socket, and reattach the
lamp assembly.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
Rear Liftgate Mounted Tail Lamp
1. Raise the liftgate.
2. Use a fiber stick or flat blade screw driver to pry the
lower trim from the liftgate.
3. Disconnect the two trim panel lights.
4. Tail lamps are now visible. Rotate socket(s) counter
clockwise.
5. Remove/replace bulb(s).
6. Reinstall the socket(s)
7. Reverse process to reinstall the liftgate trim.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear License Lamp
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the license lamp lens.
The center high-mounted stop lamp is an LED assembly. 2. Pull bulb from socket.
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
3. Replace bulb.
4. Reinstall lens.
7
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S
Fuel (Approximate)
3.6L and 5.7L Engines
25 Gallons
Engine Oil With Filter
3.6L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
6 Quarts
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
7 Quarts
Cooling System *
3.6L Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
10.4 Quarts
Formula or equivalent)
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
15.4 Quarts
Mile Formula or equivalent) – Without Trailer Tow Package
5.7 Liter Engine (MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000
16 Quarts
Mile Formula or equivalent) – With Trailer Tow Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
94 Liters
5.6 Liters
6.6 Liters
9.9 Liters
14.6 Liters
15.2 Liters
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs – 3.6L Engine
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
RER8ZWYCB4 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
LZFR5C–11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
87 Octane Acceptable – 89 Octane Recommended
7
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Transfer Case – 3.6L Engine
Transfer Case – 5.7L Engine
Axle Differential (Front-Rear)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir – 3.6L Engine
Power Steering Reservoir – 5.7L Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use Shell Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Synthetic Gear & Axle Lubricant SAE
75W-140 (API-GL5) with friction modifier additive.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703 should be
used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is
acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Hydraulic Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4, or MOPAR威
ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
660 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inremind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
formation
scheduled maintenance.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change interBased on engine operation conditions, the oil change
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
indicator message will illuminate. This means that serwhichever comes first.
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
• Check engine oil level
influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the • Check windshield washer fluid level
change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles
(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as • Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
needed
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 661 M
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Change oil and filter.
• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped
with dipstick.
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
• Inspect exhaust system.
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
8
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends, and
replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change
if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
function.
Inspect transfer case fluid.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
2
32,000
M 662 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I Maintenance Chart
N
Mileage or time passed (whichever
T
comes first)
E
N
A
Or Years:
N
Or
Kilometers:
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air filter.
Replace air conditioning filter.
Replace spark plugs (3.6L engine).**
Replace spark plugs (5.7L engine).**
Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
Change automatic transmission fluid and
filter, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 663 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 664 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed (whichever
N
comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
S Change automatic transmission fluid and
C filter.
H Change transfer case fluid.
E
D Inspect and replace PCV valve if necesU sary.
L ** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
E
S yearly intervals do not apply.
8
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 665 M
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .669
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 䡵 MOPAR威 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .670
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .670
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .674
9
668 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 669
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
670 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423–6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 671
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
672 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 673
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR姞 PARTS
9
674 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 675
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
9
676 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
678 INDEX
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .222
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .627
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .614
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Air Conditioning, Rear Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .616
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
All Wheel Drive (AWD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .423
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
INDEX 679
Fluid Level Check . . .
Fluid Type . . . . . . . .
Special Additives . . . .
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet
Auxiliary Power Outlet . .
...........
...........
...........
...........
(Power Outlet)
...........
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . .
.634
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.634
Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
.635
.456 Brake/Transmission Interlock .
.275 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . .
.275 Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .615
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .27
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .631
Calibration, Compass . . . . . .
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . .
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . .
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . .
Radiator (Coolant Pressure)
Carbon Monoxide Warning . .
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . .
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.631
.483
.318
.449
.651
.112
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
....
....
....
...
....
....
....
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.542
.613
.482
.628
.109
.292
.291
10
680 INDEX
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .608
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Conserving Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.640
.423
.355
.444
.422
.514
.340
.342
.341
.338
..
.
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.380
.380
.336
.260
.671
.628
INDEX 681
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . .
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.625
.627
.656
.629
.628
.626
.625
.629
.628
.628
.626
.638
.222
.282
.669
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .636
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .628
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy. . . . . .336
E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609 Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.538
.275
.295
.122
.469
10
682 INDEX
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . .
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . .
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . .
Engine
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.486
.488
.489
.218
.490
.315
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.594
.574
.576
.590
.596
.608
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.614
.446
.108
.605
.605
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .625
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
INDEX 683
Exhaust System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Filters
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613 Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Fog Light Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112 Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . .
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .540 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .538 Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .541
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
. . . . . . . . . . .656
. . . . . . . . . . .112
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.635
.631
.611
.482
.657
.315
.653
.184
.243
.574
.594
.632
.533
.542
.536
.534
10
684 INDEX
Conserving . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Light . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . .
Methanol . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . .
Requirements . . . .
Saver Mode . . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . .
Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Optimizer . . . . . .
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . .
Fuel System Caution . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...
...
..
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.336
.534
.542
.533
.317
.332
.536
.534
.533
.533
.336
.656
.538
.542
.336
.336
.543
.643
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .542
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Conserving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .642
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .548
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546
INDEX 685
Hazard Warning Flasher .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . .
Bulb Replacement . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam . . . . . . . .
On With Wipers . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . .
Hill Descent Control . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . .
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door
Hood Release . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.......
.......
Opener) .
.......
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .641
. . . . .553 Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
. . . . .282 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
. . . . .262 Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
. . . . .198
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.574
.652
.652
.642
.315
.201
.209
.652
.123
.446
.316
.494
10
686 INDEX
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .590 Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Key, Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . .497
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
INDEX 687
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .312
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Rear Servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Rear Tail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .652
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .312
Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .654
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .311
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .545
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Feature (Memory Seat) . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Seats and Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.615
.610
.660
.312
.674
.192
.192
.192
.534
10
688 INDEX
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Mode
Fuel Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .656
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .611
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .612
INDEX 689
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .614
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .607
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Overdrive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .260
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Park Sense System, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Pets, Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .505
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .275
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . .216
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .581
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
10
690 INDEX
Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .24 Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Quadra-Trac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . .566
Shifting out of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .570
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .512
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .628 Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .617
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420 Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .632 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257 Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .420
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130 Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651
Rear Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Rear Park Sense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248 Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .609
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184 Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .518
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294 Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
INDEX 691
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .521
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .58
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Security Against Theft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
10
692 INDEX
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .669
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .671
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .312
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .674
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Signals, Turn. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
SmartBeams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .520
Snow Plow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .513
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .514
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Engine Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .420
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650
INDEX 693
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .68
Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . .
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard . .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.311
.215
.423
.321
.293
.215
.504
.498
.112
.517
.509
.520
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.576
.514
.509
.512
.510
.576
.517
.504
.522
.311
.675
.512
.518
.521
.498
.500
.513
.577
.516
10
694 INDEX
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System Tips . . . .
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Minimum Requirements . .
Trailer and Tongue Weight
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.558
.517
.498
.555
.596
.548
.147
.598
.554
.563
.554
.147
.487
.493
.548
.562
.553
.556
.555
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .634
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . .262
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .24
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .675
INDEX 695
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .380
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .533
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .505
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .613
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640
Wind Buffeting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .619
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Challenger
Chrysler Group LLC
13WD01-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement